Mazda 2009 B2300 Truck Owner's Guide

JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 6 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006

/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og

Table of Contents

Introduction

Instrument Cluster

Warning lights and chimes

Gauges

Entertainment Systems

AM/FM stereo

AM/FM Stereo single CD/MP3 system

AM/FM stereo with single CD

In-dash CDX6/MP3 disc Premium Pioneer audio system

AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3

Auxiliary input jack

Satellite radio information

Climate Controls

Heater only

Manual heating and air conditioning

Lights

Headlamps

Turn signal control

Bulb replacement

Driver Controls

Windshield wiper/washer control

Steering wheel adjustment

Power windows

Mirrors

Speed control

Locks and Security

Keys

Locks

Anti-theft system

4

57

58

59

60

60

66

66

66

70

43

44

46

46

49

50

57

12

12

17

19

19

21

24

29

32

37

39

43

1

PAGE: 1 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 6 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og

REVIEW COPY ——

2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)



2


Seating and Safety Restraints

Seating

Safety restraints

Airbags

Child restraints

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Tire information

Tire inflation

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Vehicle loading

Trailer towing

Recreational towing

Driving

Starting

Brakes

Transmission operation

Roadside Emergencies

Hazard flasher switch

Fuel pump shut-off switch

Fuses and relays

Changing tires

Lug nut torque

Overheating

Jump starting

Wrecker towing

Customer Assistance

Cleaning

Maintenance and Specifications

Engine compartment

Engine oil

Battery


REVIEW COPY ——


214

220

230

234

240

114

115

130

135

142

151

154

154

158

162

175

175

175

176

186

195

195

196

202

203

73

73

75

91

99

111




Engine coolant

Fuel information

Maintenance product specifications and capacities

Engine data

Accessories

Index

242

248

266

270

274

275

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation.

Copyright © 2006 MNAO

3


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CONGRATULATIONS

Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.

The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.

For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following website:

• In the United States: www.mazdausa.com

• In Canada: www.mazda.ca

Additional owner information is given in separate publications.

This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available.

Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is an integral part of the vehicle.

WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.

The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.

collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.

CIMS #517043 com_calif-warning itdseq=1

CIMS #869811 com_preface.mazda

itdseq=2

4


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION

Warning symbols in this guide

How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by a bold

WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.

Warning symbols on your vehicle

When you see this symbol, it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before touching or attempting adjustment of any kind.

Protecting the environment

We must all play our part in protecting the environment. Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol.

Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.

BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE

There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in.

SPECIAL NOTICES

Emission warranty

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper

Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance

Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s Guide.

5

CIMS #729502 com_environ-info itdseq=3

CIMS #958891 com_handbook-warn.mazda

itdseq=4 art=expii001_b

CIMS #958892 com_warns-on-vehicle.mazda

itdseq=5 art=ctoss542_a

CIMS #1123266 com_environ-protect.mazda

itdseq=6 art=expii002_b

CIMS #689351 com_breaking_veh.j14

itdseq=7

CIMS #729514 com_special-note-title itdseq=8

CIMS #689352 com_emission-warning.j14

itdseq=9


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

Event Data Recorder

The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data potentially including but not limited to information such as:

• the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and passengers,

• information about the performance of various systems and modules in the vehicle, and

• information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system status potentially including information related to how the driver operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed.

This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by:

• service and repair facilities.

• law enforcement or government agencies.

• the Manufacturer and Distributor.

Special instructions

For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls.

WARNING: Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.

Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.

WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.

Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles

WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.

Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.

Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.

6

CIMS #1138947 com_edr-warning.mazda

itdseq=10

CIMS #1066766 com_elec-cntrls.non-euro itdseq=11

CIMS #80196 com_utility-notice itdseq=12


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

Using your vehicle with a snowplow

WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.

Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.

Using your vehicle as an ambulance

WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.

Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.

CIMS #1319986 com_snowplowing.mazda

itdseq=13

CIMS #1123276 com_using-ambulance.mazda

itdseq=14

CIMS #1063876 com_wcr-symbols.mbs

itdseq=15

7


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

See Owner’s Guide Safety Alert

Protecting the

Environment

Airbag - Front

Fasten Safety Belt

Child Seat

Child Seat Lower

Anchor

Brake System

Brake Fluid -

Non-Petroleum Based

Hazard Warning Flasher

Airbag - Side

Child Seat Installation

Warning

Child Seat Tether

Anchor

Anti-Lock Brake System

Master Lighting Switch

Fog Lamps-Front

Fuse Compartment

Windshield Wash/Wipe

Rear Window

Defrost/Demist

Fuel Pump Reset

Windshield

Defrost/Demist

Power Windows

8


REVIEW COPY ——




Introduction

Engine Oil

Vehicle Symbol Glossary

Power Window Lockout

Personal Alarm System

Feature

Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Temperature

Do Not Open When Hot

Battery

Avoid Smoking, Flames, or Sparks

Battery Acid Explosive Gas

Power Steering Fluid Fan Warning

Maintain Correct Fluid

Level

Engine Air Filter

Jack

MAX

MIN Emission System

Passenger Compartment

Air Filter

Check fuel cap

Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control

Low Tire Pressure

Warning

INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE

The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.

Mazda may change the contents without notice.

9

CIMS #604091 com_info_guide.j14

itdseq=16


REVIEW COPY ——





Instrument panel dimmer control

(pg. 47)

Headlamp control

(pg. 46)

Instrument cluster

(pg. 12)

CIMS #1550353 mbs_ipanelleft-07 art=mbsip1_b

10

Turn signal and wiper/washer control

(pg. 57)

Driver air bag

(pg. 91)

* If equipped

Parking brake release

(pg. 160)

Speed control*

(pg. 60)

Hood release

(pg. 229)


REVIEW COPY ——




4wd control*

(pg. 169)


Audio system

(pg. 19) Passenger airbag indicator

(pg. 96)

CIMS #1550352 mbs_ipanelright-07 art=mbsip2_b

Cigar lighter*

(pg. 59)

Auxiliary power point*

(pg. 58)

Climate control system

(pg. 43)

* if equipped

11


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES CIMS #1264223 com_warn-lights.mbs04

itdseq=19 art=mbsis302_c

Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.

Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the respective system warning light for additional information.

Check engine: The Check Engine indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the ON position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the

9Check engine9 light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the

9Check engine9 light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter.

Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board

Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On

board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.

art=expis315_a

12


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.

Check fuel cap: Illuminates when the fuel cap may not be properly installed. Check the fuel filler cap if this light remains on. Continued driving with this light on may cause the Check Engine warning light to come on.

It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap

depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel

filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

Brake system warning light: To confirm the brake system warning

!

P light is functional, it will momentarily illuminate when the

BRAKE ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer.

WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.

Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.

art=dnois308_a art=dnogf004_a

13


REVIEW COPY ——





Anti-lock brake system: If the

ABS light stays illuminated or continues to flash, a malfunction has been detected; have the system serviced immediately by your

ABS authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated.

Airbag readiness: If this light fails to illuminate when ignition is turned to ON, continues to flash or remains on, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system has been detected.

Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten your safety belt. A BeltMinder t chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt. Refer to the Seating and safety restraints chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder t chime feature.

Low tire pressure warning:

Illuminates when your tire pressure is low. If the light remains on at start up or while driving, the tire pressure should be checked. Refer to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3 seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.

Charging system: Illuminates when the battery is not charging properly.

Engine oil pressure: Illuminates when the oil pressure falls below the normal range, refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter.

14 art=dnogf001_a art=ranis319_a art=exdis014_a art=winis320_a art=expis017_a art=dnois006_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Engine coolant temperature:

Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to

Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot.

Foglamps: Illuminates when the foglamps are turned on. Refer to

Foglamp control in the Lights chapter.

Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is at or near empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter).

Door ajar: Illuminates when the ignition is in the ON position and any door is open.

Overdrive off (if equipped):

Illuminates when the overdrive

O/D function of the transmission has

OFF been turned off, refer to the

Driving chapter.

If the light does not come on, have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur.

Four wheel drive low (if

equipped): Illuminates when four-wheel drive low is engaged.

4x4

LOW

NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.

Four wheel drive high (if

equipped): Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. It

4x4 may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged, refer to the Driving chapter for more information.

15 art=f12ip034_a art=dewii002_a art=dnois002_a art=cgris311_a art=expis024_a art=expis340_a art=f12ip031_a


REVIEW COPY ——





NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.

Anti-theft system: Flashes when the SecuriLock y Passive Anti-theft

System has been activated.

Speed control (if equipped):

Illuminates when the speed control is engaged. Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged.

Turn signal: Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on. If the indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.

High beams: Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on.

Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door is opened.

Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.

Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not fully closed).

Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h).

art=ranis348_a art=dewis310_a art=exdis005_a art=expis021_a

16


REVIEW COPY ——




GAUGES


CIMS #1264222 com_gauges.mbs04

itdseq=20 art=mbsis304_c

Speedometer: Indicates the current vehicle speed.

art=ranis341_a

Engine coolant temperature

gauge: Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature, the needle will be in the normal range (between “H” and

“C”). If it enters the red section, the engine is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.

Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result in serious burns.

Odometer: Registers the total miles

(kilometers) of the vehicle.

17 art=ranis343_a art=ranis345_b


REVIEW COPY ——





Trip odometer: Registers the miles

(kilometers) of individual journeys.

Press the button once until “TRIP” appears in the display (this represents the trip mode). To reset the trip, press and hold the control again for approximately 2 seconds, until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip and odometer, press and release the control.

Tachometer: Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine.

Fuel gauge: Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the ignition is in the ON position). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade.

Proper gauge indication requires the ignition to be in the OFF or

ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons is needed for correct indication after refueling.

NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.

Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information.

art=ranis346_b art=ranis344_a art=ranis342_a

18


REVIEW COPY ——




AUDIO SYSTEMS

AM/FM stereo (if equipped)


CIMS #1486771 com_audio-title.06

CIMS #1239876 com_pionamfm.ran

itdseq=22 art=rancf807_b

Display preference: You can select Clock mode, which displays the time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio frequency, to appear in the radio display. Press CLK repeatedly to toggle between

Clock and Frequency modes. If clock mode is selected and a radio function is pressed (i.e. SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio information will display momentarily and then again display the time.

1. AM/FM: Press to select

AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.

2. CLK —To set the time:

Ensure that your audio system is turned off. Press and hold

CLK until the hours flash in the display. Press AUDIO to adjust the hours.

Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press

AUDIO to adjust the minutes.

To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock mode and frequency mode.

19 art=rancf831_a art=rancf832_a


REVIEW COPY ——





3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO repeatedly to toggle through the following modes and use / to make adjustments in those modes.

Bass: Press AUDIO to decrease/increase the bass setting.

Treble: Press AUDIO

AUDIO to decrease/increase the treble setting.

to adjust the audio between the left and Balance: Press right speakers.

Hours: Press

Minute: Press

AUDIO

AUDIO to decrease/increase the hours.

to decrease/increase the minutes.

4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio frequency and in audio mode to select various settings.

5. Memory presets: To set a station: Select frequency band

AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset station, press the desired memory preset.

6. SEEK: Press SEEK to access the previous or next radio station. If pressed for less than .5 seconds, the system will seek to the next or previous station.

7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn the system ON/OFF. Turn to adjust the volume levels.

If the volume is set above a certain level, and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back on.

art=rancf830_a art=221cf840_a art=221cf837_a art=221cf841_a

20


REVIEW COPY ——




AM/FM stereo single CD system


CIMS #1296341 com_scdpio.mbs04

itdseq=23 art=rancf806_c

1. CD eject: Press to eject the

CD.

2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until

SELECT HOUR or SELECT

MINUTE is displayed. Press

MENU to adjust the hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is off.

3. MUTE: Press to mute the playing media. Press again to return to the playing media.

4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly to toggle through the following modes and use / to make adjustment in those modes.

21 art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a art=rancf834_a art=rancf838_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Autoset: Press MENU to set the strongest local radio stations for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset stations.

When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the remaining presets.

Bass: Press MENU to decrease/increase the bass setting.

Treble: Press MENU to decrease/increase the treble setting.

Balance: Press right speakers.

MENU to adjust the audio between the left and

Fade: Press rear speakers.

MENU to adjust the audio between the front and

5. TUNE: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio frequency and also to select various settings in menu mode.

6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to play the tracks on the current

CD in random order.

7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD track.

8. FF (Fast forward): Press to manually advance in a CD track.

9. REW (Rewind): Press to manually reverse in a CD track.

REW

1


AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly.

11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access the next/previous strong station. In

CD mode, press to advance to the next/previous track.

22 art=rancf835_a art=rancf835_a art=rancf845_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a art=rancf828_b art=rancf839_a


REVIEW COPY ——





12. SCAN: Press to toggle between

SCAN ON and SCAN OFF. When activated, the system scans up through and plays a brief sampling of available radio stations or CD tracks. Press again to stop.

13. AM/FM:Press to select

AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

14. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn

ON/OFF. Turn to increase/decrease volume.

If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off, the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on.

15. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If a CD is already present in the system, the disc will begin to play.

16. CD slot: Insert a CD label side up.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.

art=221cf812_a art=rancf842_a art=221cf819_a art=rancf837_a art=221cf823_a

23


REVIEW COPY ——





AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 Satellite Compatible system

(if equipped)

CIMS #1569891 com_mbsscd.pio

itdseq=24 art=rancf861_a

1. CD eject: Press to eject the

CD/MP3.



MINS is displayed. Press



4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly to scroll through the following

24 art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a art=rancf834_a art=rancf838_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Entertainment Systems modes and use / to make an adjustment in those modes.

CATEGORY (Satellite Radio if equipped): Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY ALL). In

CATEGORY ALL, press / to scroll through the list of available

Sirius Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK or SCAN to select the channels within each category. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that specific channel. To select a different category, press MENU until CATEGORY ALL appears in the display.

Press / to select a different category.

Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.

Check with your authorized dealer for availability.

Autoset: Press MENU to set the strongest local radio stations for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset stations.






MENU

MENU to adjust the audio between the left and to adjust the audio between the front and

Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU go to the previous/next directory.

MENU

Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.

to

Track # / Normal music name/File name: Press MENU to access and use / to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music name or file name).

25 art=rancf835_a


REVIEW COPY ——





5. TUNE: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio frequency and also to select various settings in menu mode.

In CATEGORY ALL, press / to scroll through the list of available

SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to Category

Mode under Menu for further information.



6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to play the current CD/MP3 tracks in random order. In MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory in random order.

7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD/MP3 track. The selection will repeat continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.

8. FF (Fast forward): Press to manually advance in a CD/MP3 track.

9. REW (Rewind): Press to manually reverse in a CD/MP3 track.

REW

1


AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly. You can save up to 18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets, six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns.



26 art=rancf835_a art=rancf845_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a art=rancf828_b art=rancf839_a


REVIEW COPY ——





11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access the previous/next ( / ) strong station. In CD/MP3 mode, press to advance to the previous/next ( / ) track.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,

News, etc.), press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold the previous /next channels.

SEEK In TEXT MODE, press display text.

In CATEGORY ALL, press TUNE

SEEK to fast seek through to view the previous/additional to select a category.

In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK to select a channel within that category.



12. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and CD mode, press for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks.

Press again to stop.

In MP3 flat file mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.

In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.

In MP3 music name/file name mode, press and release to view the next

12 characters in the MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the

Satellite text message.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.



27 art=rancf874_a art=rancf862_a


REVIEW COPY ——






AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.

14. AUX: Press to access AUX modes. To return to radio mode, press AM/FM.

If equipped with Satellite Radio, press AUX to cycle through

SAT1, SAT2 SAT3 (Satellite Radio mode, if available) and

LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode, if equipped).






16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a CD/MP3 is already present in the system, the disc will begin to play.

17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label side up.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.

28 art=rancf858_a art=rancf857_a art=221cf819_a art=rancf837_a art=221cf823_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Premium in-dash CD6/MP3 disc audio system CIMS #1273156 com_premcd.mbs

itdseq=25 art=rancf804_c



2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in the system, the disc will start playing.

3. EJ (CD eject): To eject an individual CD/MP3, press the eject control and select the correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.

Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.



MINUTE is displayed. Press


29 art=rancf825_a art=rancf837_a art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a


REVIEW COPY ——







Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for

AM/FM1/FM2 . Press MENU to access. Use MENU to set.






MENU


Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU / to go to the previous/next directory.


Track #/normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and use / to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music name or file name).

7. TUNE/DISC: Press to manually go down/up ( / ) the radio frequency, select the previous/next CD or to select various settings in menu mode. In MP3 directory mode, press / to access the previous/next directory

8. TEXT: In MP3 normal music name/file name mode, press to view the next 12 characters in the MP3 music name/filename of the current

MP3 track and directory.

30 art=rancf834_a art=rancf838_a art=rancf846_a


REVIEW COPY ——






CD/MP3 in random order. In

MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory in random order.

10. COMP (Compression): In

CD/MP3 modes, press to bring loud and soft passages together for a more consistent listening level.

11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD/MP3 track.



REW

1


AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset station, press the desired memory preset.

15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press / to access the next/previous strong station or track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current directory.

16. SCAN: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press for a brief sampling of radio stations or

CD/MP3 tracks. In MP3 directory mode, press to hear a brief sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.




31 art=rancf845_a art=221cf807_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a art=rancf828_b art=rancf840_a art=221cf812_a art=221cf841_a


REVIEW COPY ——





18. LOAD: To load a CD/MP3 disc to a specific slot, press LOAD and select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.

19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label side up.

CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your dealer for further information.

Premium and Audiophile In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Satellite

Compatible audio systems (if equipped)

CIMS #1569892 com_mbscdx6.pio


32


REVIEW COPY ——







2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3 mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in the system, the disc will start playing.

3. AUX: Press to access AUX modes. To return to radio mode, press AM/FM.

If equipped with Satellite

Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3

(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode, if equipped).



4. EJ (CD eject): To eject an individual CD/MP3, press the eject control and select the correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.

Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.



MINS is displayed. Press




CATEGORY (Satellite Radio if equipped): Press MENU until the currently active category appears in the display (CATEGORY ALL). In

33 art=rancf869_a art=rancf867_a art=rancf868_a art=rancf827_b art=rancf833_a art=rancf834_a art=rancf838_a art=rancf846_a


REVIEW COPY ——





CATEGORY ALL, press / to scroll through the list of available

Sirius Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press SEEK or SCAN to select the channels within each category. After a category is selected, press SEEK to search for that specific channel. To select a different category, press MENU until CATEGORY ALL appears in the display.

Press / to select a different category.



Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press

MENU to access. Use MENU to set.






MENU


Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU the previous/next directory.

/ to go to


Track #/ normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and use / to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music name or file name).

8. TUNE/DISC: In radio mode, press to manually go down/up

( / ) the radio frequency, or to access another CD/MP3.

Also use in menu mode to select various settings.

In CATEGORY ALL, press / to scroll through the list of available

SIRIUS channel categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to Category

Mode under Menu for further information.



REVIEW COPY ——






CD/MP3 in random order. In

MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory in random order.

10. COMP (Compression): In

CD/MP3 modes, press to bring loud and soft passages together for a more consistent listening level.

11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the current CD/MP3 track. The selection will repeat continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.



REW

1


REW

1

FF

2

REPEAT

3

COMP

4

SHUFF

5

AM/FM; tune to a station, press and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset station, press the desired memory preset. You can save up to 18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.

6

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets, six each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a preset control until sound returns.



15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press / to access the previous/next strong station or track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current directory.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,

35 art=221cf808_a art=221cf807_a art=221cf806_a art=221cf805_a art=rancf828_b art=rancf877_a art=rancf874_a


REVIEW COPY ——





News, etc.), press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel in the selected category. Press and hold the previous /next channels.

In TEXT MODE, press SEEK display text.

In CATEGORY ALL, press TUNE

SEEK to fast seek through to view the previous/additional to select a category.

In CATEGORY MODE, press SEEK to select a channel within that category.



16. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and CD mode, press for a brief sampling of radio stations or CD tracks.

Press again to stop.

In MP3 flat file mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3 tracks.

In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.

In MP3 music name/file name mode, press and release to view the next

12 characters in the MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track and directory.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the

Satellite text message.

In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.




18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.

To load a CD/MP3 disc to a specific slot, press LOAD and select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.

36 art=rancf862_a art=221cf841_a art=rancf875_a


REVIEW COPY ——





19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label side up.


Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The

Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in-vehicle audio system. This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity. To achieve optimal performance, please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system.

Required equipment:

1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones

2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm) connectors at each end

To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:

1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.

2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off.

3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle.

37 art=221cf823_a

CIMS #1538510 com_aux-inputjack.ran

itdseq=27 art=ranad857_c


REVIEW COPY ——





4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.

5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the volume.

6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in the display.

You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low.

7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.

Troubleshooting:

1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.

2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.

Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.

3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.

4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control

(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.

5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.

GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION

Radio frequencies:

AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications

Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications

Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:

38

CIMS #1509322 com_cdcares-info.06

itdseq=28


REVIEW COPY ——





AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz

FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz

Radio reception factors:

There are three factors that can affect radio reception:

• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed.

CD/CD player care

Do:

• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.

• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out.

Don’t:

• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time.

• Clean using a circular motion.


Audio system warranty and service

Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda dealership.

Satellite radio information (if equipped)

Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For

39

CIMS #1491146 com_cares-sr.06

itdseq=29


REVIEW COPY ——




Entertainment Systems more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels, visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in

Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.

Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute.

Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO

SIGNAL to indicate the interference.

SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive

SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed

SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:

• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels over the internet (U.S. customers only).

For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at

1–888–539–7474.

Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.

Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit

Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your

40


REVIEW COPY ——




Entertainment Systems satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.

Radio Display

ACQUIRING

SAT FAULT

Condition

Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel.

Internal module or system failure present.

Action Required

No action required.

This message should disappear shortly.

INVALID CHNL

UNSUBSCRIBED

NO TEXT

Channel no longer available.

Subscription not available for this channel.

Artist information not available.

If this message does not clear within a short period of time, or with an ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault. See your authorized dealer for service.

This previously available channel is no longer available. Tune to another channel. If the channel was one of your presets, you may choose another channel for that preset button.

Contact SIRIUS at

1–888–539–7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel.

Artist information not available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly.

41


REVIEW COPY ——





Radio Display

NO TEXT

NO TEXT

NO SIGNAL

UPDATING

CALL SIRIUS

1–888–539–7474

Condition

Song title information not available.

Category information not available.

Loss of signal from the SIRIUS satellite or

SIRIUS tower to the vehicle antenna.

Update of channel programming in progress.

Satellite service has been deactivated by

SIRIUS Satellite

Radio.

Action Required

Song title information not available at this time on this channel.

The system is working properly.

Category information not available at this time on this channel.

The system is working properly.

You are in a location that is blocking the

SIRIUS signal (i.e., tunnel, under an overpass, dense foliage, etc). The system is working properly. When you move into an open area, the signal should return.

No action required. The process may take up to three minutes.

Call SIRIUS at

1–888–539–7474 to re-activate or resolve subscription issues.

42


REVIEW COPY ——





HEATER ONLY SYSTEM

(IF EQUIPPED)

1. Fan speed adjustment:

Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

2. Temperature selection:

Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle.

3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.

: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.

OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.

: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents.

: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.

: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and floor vents.

: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.

Operating tips

• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place the air flow selector in the position.

• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air flow to the rear seats.

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select .

2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.

4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

43

CIMS #1064356 com_heatran.fly

art=rancf780_a itdseq=30

CIMS #1052492 com_htonlytips.fly

itdseq=31


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

(IF EQUIPPED)

1. Fan speed adjustment:

Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.

2. Temperature selection:

Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle.

3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.

MAX A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Recirculated air flows from the instrument panel vents only. Temperature of air is not adjustable (cold only).

A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Outside air flows from the instrument panel vents only.

: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents only.

(A/C compressor is off).

OFF: Outside air is shut off and the fan motor does not operate.

: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).

off).

: Distributes outside air through the floor vents. (A/C compressor is

: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).

: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents only.

(A/C compressor is ON).

Operating tips

• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place the air flow selector in the position.

• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.

44

CIMS #1284326 com_man-ac-mbs.fly


CIMS #1284327 com_op-tipfly.mbs

itdseq=33


REVIEW COPY ——





• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in

MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.

• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats.

• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield.

To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:

1. Select .

2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.

3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.

4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.

To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.

WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.

45


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

HEADLAMP CONTROL

Turns the lamps off.

Turns on the parking lamps, instrument panel lamps, license plate lamps and tail lamps.

Turns the headlamps on.

Foglamp control (if equipped)

The foglamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is in the or position and the high beams are not turned on.

Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp indicator light on the headlamp control and in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

High beams

After turning the headlamps on, push the lever toward the instrument panel to activate. Pull the lever towards you to deactivate.

CIMS #222826 com_headlamp_title itdseq=34

CIMS #1034721 com_headlamp_control.04

itdseq=35 art=mltcf403_a

CIMS #83532 com_fog-title.ie

itdseq=36

CIMS #1538461 com_foglamps.ran-07 art=rancf334_a

CIMS #1124037 com_brights.mazda


46


REVIEW COPY ——




Flash to pass

Pull toward you slightly to activate and release to deactivate.

Lights

CIMS #54762 com_flash_to_pass itdseq=39 art=rancf323_a

Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)

Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.

To activate:

• the ignition must be in the ON position and

• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp.

WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp

(DRL) (if equipped) system does not activate the parking lights or side marker lights and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.

PANEL DIMMER CONTROL

Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parklamp operation.

Move the control up or down to adjust the intensity of the panel lighting.

Move the control to the full upright position, past detent, to turn on the interior lamps.

AIMING THE HEADLAMPS

The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have

47

CIMS #222828 com_drl_title_ie itdseq=40

CIMS #1124036 com_daytime_lamps.mazda

itdseq=41

CIMS #222830 com_panel_dimmer_title itdseq=42

CIMS #1048941 com_panel_dimmer2.ran

art=muscf400_b

CIMS #975083 com_aim-lites.info.fly

itdseq=44


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by a qualified service technician.

Headlamp aim adjustment

The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be aimed visually by doing the following:

1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam pattern.

• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)

• (2) Center height of lamp to ground

• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)

• (4) Horizontal reference line

• (5) Center of headlamps

• (6) Center line of the vehicle

2. The center of the headlamp is marked either on the lens (a circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp

(mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape works well).

3. Turn on the low beam headlamps and open the hood.

4. Locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern and place the top edge of the intensity zone even with the horizontal reference line (4). If the top edge of the high intensity area is not even with the horizontal line, follow the next step to adjust it.

48

CIMS #1437296 com_vert_aim.mbs

itdseq=45 art=ranmc313_a art=ranmc314_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

5. Locate the vertical adjuster for each headlamp. Adjust the aim by using a 4 mm wrench to turn the adjuster control either clockwise (to adjust down) or counterclockwise (to adjust up).

6. In addition to the horizontal line marked in step 2, a pair of vertical lines (5) must be marked at the center line of the headlamps on the wall or screen.

7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical line, follow the next step to adjust it.

8. Locate the horizontal adjuster for each headlamp. Use a 4 mm wrench, turning it clockwise or counterclockwise, to place the left edge of the high intensity area even with the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment.

TURN SIGNAL CONTROL

• Push down to activate the left turn signal.

• Push up to activate the right turn signal.

art=mbscf406_a art=mbscf407_a

CIMS #54764 com_turn_indicator itdseq=46 art=rancf324_a

49


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

INTERIOR LAMPS

Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped)

The courtesy lamp lights when:

• any door is opened.

• the instrument panel dimmer switch is held up until the courtesy lamps come on.

• the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlamp Condensation

The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.

Using the right bulbs

Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an

“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility.

NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.

Function

Park/turn/side marker lamps (front)

Headlamps

Fog lamps (if equipped)

Hi-mount brake lamp

Rear stop/tail lamps

Rear turn lamps

Number of bulbs

2

2

2

1

2

2

Trade number

3157 A (amber)

9007

9006

922

4157K or 3157K

3156

50

CIMS #54745 com_interior.02

itdseq=47

CIMS #628962 com_courtesy_lamps.ran


CIMS #80513 com_ext_bulbs.02

itdseq=49

CIMS #1462914 com_condensation itdseq=50

CIMS #684809 com_bulb_chart.mbs

itdseq=51


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

Function

Rear license plate lamps

Backup lamps

Dome lamp

Map/dome-SuperCab

(if equipped)

Number of bulbs

2

2

1

2

Trade number

194

3155

912

904

Map/dome-Regular

Cab (if equipped)

1

904

All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.

To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.

Replacing the interior bulbs

Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:

• interior overhead lamp

• map lamp

For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.

Replacing exterior bulbs

Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.

Replacing headlamp bulbs

NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with this, visit your local Mazda dealer.

WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around halogen bulbs.

CIMS #600057 com_interior_bulbs.j14

itdseq=52

CIMS #600056 com_check-bulbs.j14

itdseq=53

CIMS #684808 com_headlamps.mbs

itdseq=54

51


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.

To remove the headlamp bulb:

1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.

2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Locate the bulb retaining ring behind the headlamp assembly.

art=mbscf404_a

4. Remove the bulb retaining ring by turning it counterclockwise and remove the old bulb by gently pulling it straight back out of the lamp assembly. Keep the retaining ring to retain the new bulb.

To install the new bulb:

Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear safety glasses while handling bulbs.

NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used.

1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the

52 art=mbscf400_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear of the lamp assembly.

2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.”

3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into position.

4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you should not need to align it again.

Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs

1. Make sure headlamp switch is in

OFF position, then open the hood.

2. Remove the screw from lamp assembly.

3. Disengage lamp assembly by pulling it straight forward. It has a snap fit.

art=mbscf405_a

4. Rotate bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly.

art=mbscf408_a

53


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

5. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.

6. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise.

7. Align the lamp on the vehicle and push to snap in place.

8. Install the screw on lamp assembly.

Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup lamp bulbs

These bulbs are located in the same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow the same steps to replace either bulb:

1. Open the tailgate to expose the lamp assemblies.

2. Remove the four screws and the lamp assembly from vehicle.

art=dnomc306_a art=mbscf401_a

3. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp assembly.

4. Carefully pull the bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.

5. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning clockwise.

6. Install the lamp assembly and secure with four screws.

54 art=mbscf409_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

Replacing fog lamp bulbs

WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection when handling or working around halogen bulbs.

WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.

NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used.

1. Remove the bulb socket from the fog lamp by turning counterclockwise.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fog lamp bulb.

3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb.

4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise.

Replacing high-mount brake lamp

To remove the brake lamp assembly:

1. Remove the two screws and lamp assembly from vehicle.

2. Remove the bulb socket from lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise.

3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.

To install the brake lamp assembly:

1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise.

2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.

55 art=ranmc306_a art=ranmc312_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Lights

Replacing license plate lamp bulbs

The license plate bulbs are located behind the rear bumper. To change the license plate lamp bulbs:

1. Reach behind the rear bumper to locate the bulb socket.

2. Twist the socket counterclockwise and remove.

3. Pull out the old bulb from socket and push in the new bulb.

4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.

art=exdmc038_b

56


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER

Windshield wiper: Rotate the end of the control away from you to increase the speed of the wipers

(from desired interval to low or high speed position); rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers.

CIMS #992737 com_multi-lever.ran


Windshield washer: Push the end of the stalk:

• briefly: causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid.

• a quick push and hold: the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid.

• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds.

Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.

This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield, always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.

art=rancf326_a

57


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull and hold the steering wheel release control toward you.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down until you find the desired location.

3. Release the steering wheel release control. This will lock the steering wheel in position.

WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving.

CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These include:

• Utility compartment with cassette/compact disc storage

• Cupholders

• Flip up armrest

WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects can injure you in a collision.

AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)

Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.

58

CIMS #1445671 com_tilt-steering-mbs itdseq=56 art=207cf323_a

CIMS #101591 com_center.ie

itdseq=57

CIMS #101830 com_center.09


CIMS #75589 com_powerpoint

CIMS #81461 com_powerpoint.04

itdseq=60


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

The auxiliary power points are located on the instrument panel.

Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element (if equipped).

To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the power point(s) over the vehicle capacity of

12 VDC/180W. Refer to Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel in the

Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse ratings in your vehicle.

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.

Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)

Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter socket.

Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from its heating position when it is ready to be used.

Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your warranty.

POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure themselves.

WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.

Press and hold the bottom part of the rocker switch to open the window. Press and hold the top part of the rocker switch to close the window.

59 art=rancf517_e

CIMS #993361 com_pwr-window.f12



REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

One touch down

Allows the driver’s window to open fully without holding the control down. Press completely down on

AUTO and release quickly. Press again to stop.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Power mirror control (if equipped)

To adjust your mirrors:

1. Select mirror or mirror.

to adjust the left to adjust the right

2. Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror.

3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.

Fold-away mirrors

Pull the side mirrors in carefully when driving through a narrow space, like an automatic car wash.

CIMS #959854 com_auto-dwn-window itdseq=62 art=rancf519_b

CIMS #764576 com_mirror-title itdseq=63

CIMS #689332 com_pwrmirr-title.maz.ie

itdseq=64

CIMS #76084 com_power-mirrors.arrows

art=207cf015_a

CIMS #959877 com_foldaway.fly

itdseq=66 art=unocf342_a

SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).

WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose control of the vehicle.

60

CIMS #1122037 com_speed-cntrl.mbs

itdseq=67


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral) with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle or cause engine system damage.

Setting speed control

The controls for using your speed control are located on the steering wheel for your convenience.

1. Press the ON control and release it.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET + control and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

5. The indicator light on the instrument cluster will turn on.

Note:

• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill.

• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.

• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.

• If the vehicle speed decreases to 30 mph (48 km/h) or less, your speed control will disengage

Disengaging speed control

To disengage the speed control:

• Depress the brake pedal or

• Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped).

Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.

Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control, the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.

61

CIMS #1264224 com_use-spd-cntrl.mbs04

itdseq=68 art=rancf328_a art=rancf331_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

Resuming a set speed

Press the RES (resume) control and release it. This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed. The RES control will not work if the vehicle speed is not faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).

Increasing speed while using speed control

There are three ways to set a higher speed:

• Press and hold the SET + control until you get to the desired speed, then release the control.

• Press and release the SET + control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.

Reducing speed while using speed control

There are three ways to reduce a set speed:

• Press and hold the CST - control until you get to the desired speed, then release the control.

• Press and release the CST control to operate the Tap-Down function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped) until the desired vehicle speed is reached, press the SET + control.

Turning off speed control

There are three ways to turn off the speed control:

62 art=rancf330_a art=rancf331_a art=rancf332_a art=rancf331_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.

• Press the speed control OFF control.

• Turn OFF the ignition.

Note: When you turn off the speed control or the ignition, your speed control set speed memory is erased.

Note: Fully depressing the clutch pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle.

This is normal.

OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)

Activating overdrive

(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.

The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through all available gears.

Deactivating overdrive

Press the Transmission Control

Switch (TCS) located on the end of the gearshift lever. The O/D Off indicator light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The transmission will operate in all gears except overdrive.

O/D

ON/OFF

To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control

Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated.

When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode.

For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission

Operation section of the Driving chapter.

BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend the pickup box for larger loads.


CIMS #197226 com_overdrive.title-ie itdseq=69

CIMS #111943 com_overdrive-activate itdseq=70

CIMS #713261 com_overdrive-deativate.mbs

itdseq=71 art=rangf110_a

CIMS #506831 com_bed-extender.225

itdseq=72


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

To extend the bed extender:

1. Lower tailgate.

2. Pull the lever on each side of the bed extender to release it from the pickup box.

3. Lift the bed extender over on to the tailgate.

4. Evenly push down on the bed extender and push the lever in on each side locking it in place.

To stow the bed extender, follow steps one through four in reverse order.

The bed extender may be used to secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46 kg) on the tailgate.

The bed extender should always be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not in use.

Activating bed extender Theft

Deterrent Device:

The following procedure can be done with the bed extender in the stowed or extended position.

1. Locate the Phillips head screw in the middle of the vertical brace on the locking clip.

2. Turn the screw counterclockwise until you hear an audible click.

3. To deactivate, turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves freely.

64 art=207cf332_b art=221cf339_c art=207cf335_b


REVIEW COPY ——




Driver Controls

To remove the bed extender:

1. Extend the bed extender.

2. Pull the lever on each side of the bed extender to unlock it.

Make sure the locking clip screws are loose before removing the bed extender.

3. Press the locking clips below the middle bar and lift the bed extender out of the channels on the “D” pillar.

To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse order.

art=207cf333_b

65


REVIEW COPY ——





KEYS

The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an emergency.

If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock y Passive Anti-theft system, your keys are coded to your vehicle; using a non-coded key will not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied keys, replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.

POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)

Press the top of the control to unlock all doors and the bottom to lock all doors.

UNLOCK

CIMS #1556896 com_keys.ran

itdseq=73

CIMS #83545 com_powerdoor-title.ie

itdseq=74

CIMS #101856 com_power-doors.03

art=rancf508_a

LOCK

REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could be caused by:

• weather conditions,

• nearby radio towers,

• structures around the vehicle, or

• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:

66

CIMS #1392205 com_remote-title-ie.fly

itdseq=76

CIMS #1031085 com_rem-entry.fly-panic itdseq=77


REVIEW COPY ——




• unlock the vehicle doors without a key.

• lock all the vehicle doors without a key.

• activate the personal alarm.

Locks and Security art=221cf353_a

If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take

ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.

Unlocking the doors

1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior lamps will illuminate.

2. Press doors.

and release again within three seconds to unlock all the

Locking the doors

• Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the lamps will not flash.

• If is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will chirp twice.

Sounding a panic alarm

Press to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3 minutes.

Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2

(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.

Replacing the battery

The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent.

67

CIMS #1090284 com_unlock.fly-ran itdseq=78

CIMS #1090285 com_lock.fly-ran itdseq=79

CIMS #1513131 com_panic.fly-ran itdseq=80

CIMS #998940 com_battery-remote.fly

itdseq=81


REVIEW COPY ——





To replace the battery:

1. Twist a thin coin between the two halves of the remote entry transmitter near the key ring.

DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER

COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD

OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF

THE REMOTE ENTRY

TRANSMITTER.

2. Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board.

art=dewcf305_b art=f23mc007_a

3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.

4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity.

5. Snap the two halves back together.

Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should operate normally after battery replacement.

Replacing lost remote entry transmitters

If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all

remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for reprogramming.

How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters

You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four) available before beginning this procedure.

68

CIMS #999031 com_lost-remote.fly

itdseq=82


REVIEW COPY ——





Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not depressed during this sequence.

4

To reprogram the remote entry transmitters:

3

5

1. Ensure the vehicle is electronically unlocked.

2. Put the key in the ignition.

2

3. Turn the key from the 2

(LOCK) position to 3 (OFF).

1

4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF) position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.

5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been activated.

6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.

Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the procedure over again.

7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry transmitter has been programmed.

8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.

9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20 seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.

10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming mode has been exited.

Illuminated entry

The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.

The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:

• the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or

• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or

• after 25 seconds of illumination.

The inside lights will not turn off if:

• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or

• any door is open.

69 art=f12dr029_a

CIMS #1258992 com_illuminate.fly-ran itdseq=83


REVIEW COPY ——





The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if they are left on accidentally.

SECURILOCK

Y

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

SecuriLock y passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.

Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key.

Note: The SecuriLock y passive anti-theft system is not compatible with non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.

Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.

Anti-theft indicator

The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.

Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock y Passive Anti-theft system behave as follows:

• When the ignition is in the 1(OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the

SecuriLock y system is functioning as a theft deterrent.

• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for

3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the

SecuriLock y Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.

Vehicles without the SecuriLock y Passive Anti-theft system behave as follows:

70

CIMS #1090876 com_securi-title-ie.fly

itdseq=84

CIMS #1365421 com_theft-indicator2.ran

itdseq=85 art=ranis348_a


REVIEW COPY ——





• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will not flash.

• When the igniton is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for

3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.

Replacement keys

If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed.

Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys.

Programming spare keys

You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.

Tips:

• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.

• Only use Securilocky keys.

• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily accessible.

• If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s) programmed.

1. Insert a previously programmed coded key into the ignition.

2. Turn the ignition from the 3

(OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position. Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no more than

10 seconds.

3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the coded key from the ignition.

2

3

1

4

5

71

CIMS #999040 com_coded-key-replace.fly

itdseq=86

CIMS #999041 com_keyless-program.fly

itdseq=87 art=207cf313_a


REVIEW COPY ——





4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition.

5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.

Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but not more than 10 seconds.

6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second key from the ignition.

7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition.

8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.

Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.

9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.

If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.

To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure from Step 1 for each additional key.

72


REVIEW COPY ——





SEATING

Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving. The seat could slide too far leaving you unable to operate vital controls just when you need them.

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you cannot get the full protection from safety belts.

During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the safety belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.

WARNING: The passenger sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

Lift the release bar to move seat forward or backward. Ensure that the seat is locked into place.

CIMS #1072391 com_seats.231nad

itdseq=88

CIMS #1292966 com_front-seat.mbs

itdseq=89 art=ranss579_a

73


REVIEW COPY ——





Pull lever located at the side of the seat cushion up to adjust seatback.

art=ranss580_a

60/40 seat (if equipped)

To gain access to the storage compartment in your armrest (if equipped), lift the latch to open lid.

The 60/40 seat cupholder (if equipped) is detachable for cleaning.

• Firmly grasp the bottom of the cup holder and pull up.

To re-attach:

• Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60% driver’s seat.

• Press down until it is firmly latched into place.

Passenger side rear access (if equipped)

Pull up on the recliner handle. The seat will lean forward. Lift the release bar to move the seat forward to access the rear area of the cab.

art=ranss582_a

CIMS #1264846 com_rear-access.mbs


74


REVIEW COPY ——





To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position.

REAR SEATS

Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped)

To open, pull seat assembly down, then raise seatback.

To stow the seat, fold seat back down and raise seat assembly to the fully upright position.

WARNING: Do not install a child seat in the center facing jump seats as there are no child restraints recommended for use in this seating position.

WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS

Personal Safety System

Y

The Personal Safety System y provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.

Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System y consists of:

• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.

• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.

• Driver’s seat position sensor.

• Front crash severity sensor.

75

CIMS #75601 com_rear_seat_adjust itdseq=91

CIMS #899696 com_rear-jump_seat.mbs


CIMS #55015 com_seatbelts.01

itdseq=93

CIMS #1315586 com_personal_safety_p221 itdseq=94


REVIEW COPY ——





• Front passenger sensing system

• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.

• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.

• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.

• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position sensor, and indicator lights.

How does the Personal Safety System Y work?

The Personal Safety System y can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.

The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System y determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints

The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints section in this chapter.

Front crash severity sensor

The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This allows your Personal Safety System y to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.

Driver’s seat position sensor

The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System y to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat

76

CIMS #1534971 com_how_work-pss_ran itdseq=95


REVIEW COPY ——




Seating and Safety Restraints position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.

Front passenger sensing system

For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front.

WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.

WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.

The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology, parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after a collision.

When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag

supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.

Front safety belt usage sensors

The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information

77


REVIEW COPY ——




Seating and Safety Restraints allows your Personal Safety System y to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.

Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.

Front outboard safety belt pretensioners

The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy y system. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.

Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors

The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load on the occupant. Refer to Energy management retractors section in this chapter.

Determining if the Personal Safety System Y is operational

The Personal Safety System y uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System y is not required.

The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s), safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following.

• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.

• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal

Safety System y serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.

78


REVIEW COPY ——





Safety restraints precautions

WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained.

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision.

WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is stopped.

WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety belt.

WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.

79

CIMS #683646 com_belt-precautions.mbs

itdseq=96


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: On Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the rear door when the rear safety belt is still buckled.

Combination lap and shoulder belts

1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.

2. To unfasten, push the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle.

CIMS #102366 com_manual-locking-belt.ran

itdseq=97 art=f12ss511_a art=f12ss512_a

Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts

The lap belt does not adjust automatically.

WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an accident.

CIMS #685451 com_lapbelts.mbs

itdseq=98

80


REVIEW COPY ——





Insert the tongue into the correct buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from). To lengthen the belt, turn the tongue at a right angle to the belt and pull across your lap until it reaches the buckle.

art=mbsss111_a

To tighten the belt, pull the loose end of the belt through the tongue until it fits snugly across the hips.

Shorten and fasten the belt when not in use to keep the belt away from door openings and available after unfolding the seats.

For the rear jump seat, shorten and fold the belt into the seat when not in use.

Energy Management Feature

• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.

• This energy management system has a retractor assembly that is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.

The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two types of locking modes described below:

Vehicle sensitive mode

This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers.

81 art=mbsss112_a

CIMS #803601 com_energ-man-feat.ran2

itdseq=99

CIMS #73763 com_vehicle-locking-mode.01

itdseq=100


REVIEW COPY ——





Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating position only) for use with child safety seats

In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.

The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.

When to use the automatic locking mode

• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat.

Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children later in this chapter.

How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger seating position only) for use with child safety seats

• Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

CIMS #1124247 com_when_use-title.mbs

itdseq=101

CIMS #690605 com_when-to-use-lok-mode.mbs

itdseq=102

CIMS #1124248 com_how-to-use-loc-mode.mbs

itdseq=103 art=enoss522_c

• Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out.

art=exdss025_a

• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode.

How to disengage the automatic locking mode

Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

82

CIMS #1099341 com_cancel-lock-mode.mbs

itdseq=104


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire safety belt system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized dealer. Verify that the

(automatic locking retractors” in all outboard seating positions are functioning properly.

Additionally check that the

(automatic locking mode( feature for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position is functioning properly.

WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE

REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when checked according to the procedures in

Workshop Manual.

WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Safety belt pretensioner

Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and front outboard passenger seating positions.

The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system

(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.

WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system

(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners.

Front safety belt height adjustment

Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.

83

CIMS #594556 com_pretensioner-title itdseq=105

CIMS #1217381 com_pretensioner.mbs

itdseq=106

CIMS #911066 com_height-adjust.mbs

itdseq=107


REVIEW COPY ——





• Regular Cab and four–door Cab

Plus 4 art=ranss514_c

To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place.

WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Safety belt extension assembly

If the safety belt assembly is too short for you, even when fully extended, 20 cm (8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by adding a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extension assemblies can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.

Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended.

NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.

Safety belt maintenance

Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged.

NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check the automatic locking retractor on the passenger outboard seating

84

CIMS #598712 com_extension-assy.j14

itdseq=108

CIMS #1112659 com_belt-maint.mbs

itdseq=109


REVIEW COPY ——




Seating and Safety Restraints position. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Mazda recommends that all safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not.

WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision.

Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.

Safety belt warning light and indicator chime

The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.

Conditions of operation

If...

The driver’s safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position...

The driver’s safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding...

Then...

The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.

The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.

85

CIMS #55029 com_light-chime.01

itdseq=110

CIMS #55036 com_operation.01

itdseq=111


REVIEW COPY ——





If...

The driver’s safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position...

Then...

The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.

BeltMinder T

The BeltMinder t feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled.

The BeltMinder t feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the

BeltMinder t feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat, warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system.

Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the BeltMinder t feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder t warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder t feature.

CIMS #522761 com_belt_minder-title itdseq=112

CIMS #690991 com_belt_minder.mbs

itdseq=113

86


REVIEW COPY ——





If...

The driver’s and front passenger’s safety belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or less than 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned

ON...

The driver’s or front passenger’s safety belt is not buckled when the vehicle has reached at least 3 mph (5 km/h) and 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to

ON...

The driver’s or front passenger’s safety belt becomes unbuckled for approximately 1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 3 mph (5 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to ON...

Then...

The BeltMinder t feature will not activate.

The BeltMinder t feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately

5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled.

The BeltMinder t feature is activated the safety belt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds every 30 seconds, repeating for approximately

5 minutes or until the safety belts are buckled.

The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts

(All statistics based on U.S. data):

CIMS #598714 com_safety_stats.j14

itdseq=114

87


REVIEW COPY ——





Reasons given...

9Crashes are rare events9

9I’m not going far9

9Belts are uncomfortable9

9I was in a hurry9

9Safety belts don’t work9

9Traffic is light9

9Belts wrinkle my clothes9

9The people I’m with don’t wear belts

9

Consider...

36,700 crashes occur every day.

The more we drive, the more we are exposed to

9rare9 events, even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime.

3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.

Safety belts are designed to enhance comfort. If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible; this can improve comfort.

Prime time for an accident. Safety

Belt Warning Chime reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.

Safety belts, when used properly,

reduce risk of death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars, and by

60% in light trucks.

Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in

single-vehicle crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.

Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are unbelted.

Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more often in vehicles with

TWO or MORE people. Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate behavior they see.

88


REVIEW COPY ——





Reasons given...

9I have an airbag9

9I’d rather be thrown clear9

Consider...

Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.

Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40 times more likely

to DIE. Safety belts help prevent ejection, WE CAN’T

9PICK OUR

CRASH

9.

WARNING: Always wear the safety belt. Do not be tempted to sit on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning system. The safety belt and safety belt warning system are there to protect your life.

One time disable

If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles the safety belt for that seating position, the BeltMinder t is disabled for the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder t feature will enable during the same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time disable.

Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder T feature

The driver and front passenger BeltMinder t are deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process.

Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation/activation programming procedure.

Note: The driver and front passenger BeltMinder t features must be disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the same key cycle.

The driver and front passenger BeltMinder t features can be deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:

Before following the procedure, make sure that:

• The parking brake is set

89

CIMS #982456 com_one-time-dis.pass

itdseq=115

CIMS #1515506 com_mind_on-off.pass.beltlt

itdseq=116


REVIEW COPY ——





• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)

• The ignition switch is in the OFF position

• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled

WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your

BeltMinder t, this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave the BeltMinder t system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the BeltMinder t feature while driving the vehicle.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT

START THE ENGINE)

2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1 minute)

• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.

3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.

(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off.)

• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds.

4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.

• This will disable the BeltMindert feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.

• This will enable the BeltMindert feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the light off, then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second for 3 seconds again.

90


REVIEW COPY ——





AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) CIMS #1543011 com_air-bag-systems.mbs


The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term

“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not deploy.

The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:

• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the inflators and airbags).

• one or more impact and safing sensors.

• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.

• Front passenger sensing system

• Passenger airbag off indicator light.

The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal

Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the

Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the

Personal Safety System section in this chapter.

Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions

The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries.

91

CIMS #683851 com_imp_precauts.mbs

itdseq=118


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently and the risk of injury from a deploying airbag is greatest close to the trim covering the airbag module. Always wear your safety belt.

WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you should make sure that the passenger airbag is off. If the child safety seat is in the outboard seating position, slide the seat all the way back.

WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump seat.

WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active airbag.

WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.

92 art=mbsss107_a art=mbsss114_a art=mbsss113_b


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.

WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.

Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright position.

WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.

WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the

Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your authorized Mazda dealership.

WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle, including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.

WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional equipment.

WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.

93

CIMS #832821 com_imp_precauts.center

itdseq=119


REVIEW COPY ——





Children and airbags

For additional important safety information, read all information on safety restraints in this guide.


WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.

NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the way back.


WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained.

How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?

The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains sufficient longitudinal deceleration.

The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. Airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts.

94

CIMS #1062867 com_children.mbs

itdseq=120 art=mbsss114_a

CIMS #683852 com_how_work.mbs

itdseq=121 art=comss002_a


REVIEW COPY ——





The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.

While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.

WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be burned.

WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision.

Determining if the system is operational

The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.

A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:

95 art=comss003_b

CIMS #683853 com_deter_operational.mbs

itdseq=122


REVIEW COPY ——





• The readiness lights will either flash or stay lit.

• The readiness lights will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.

• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.

If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.

WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision.

Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including safety belt pretensioners)

For disposal of safety belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician.

Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.

Front passenger sensing system

The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver’s frontal air bag is not part of the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag if:

• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in the front seat,

• the system determines that a small child is present in a rear-facing child seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions,

• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,

96 art=ranis319_a

CIMS #683854 com_disposing.mbs

itdseq=123

CIMS #1534973 com_tell-tale.ran

itdseq=124


REVIEW COPY ——





• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time,

WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children

12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat (if equipped).

When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the

9passenger air bag off9 or

9pass air bag off9 indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal air bag is off. When the front passenger seat is not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.

The indicator light is located in the center stack of the instrument panel. To confirm the

9pass airbag light 9 is functional, it will momentarily illuminate when the ignition is turned to the ON position.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off, remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.

The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal air bag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.

When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the air bag is enabled (may inflate).

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the

9passenger air bag off9 or 9pass air bag off9 indicator is lit, it could be that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should be advised to ride in the back seat.

97 art=dnoss529_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Occupant

Empty seat

Small child in child safety seat or booster

Small child with safety belt buckled or unbuckled

Adult

Pass Airbag Off

Indicator Lamp

Unlit

Lit

Lit

Passenger Airbag

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Unlit Enabled

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the floor.

In case there is a problem with the passenger sensing system, the airbag readiness lamp in the instrument cluster will stay lit. Do

NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle immediately to the dealer.

WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer protection to an occupant in the center seating position.

WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer

98 art=dewii019_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer

Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.

The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the passenger airbag is disabled, the

9pass airbag off9 light may or may not be illuminated according to the table below.

Objects

Pass Airbag Off

Indicator Lamp

Unlit

Passenger Airbag

Disabled Small (i.e. 3 ring binder, small purse, bottled water)

Medium (i.e. heavy briefcase, fully packed luggage)

Empty seat, or small to medium object with safety belt buckled

Lit

Lit

Disabled

Disabled

WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system.

SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN

See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system

(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.

Important child restraint precautions

NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the

U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle.

WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision.

99

CIMS #52677 com_safety-for-kids itdseq=125

CIMS #683856 com_imp_precautions.mbs

itdseq=126


REVIEW COPY ——





NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or child restraint you might use.


Children and safety belts

If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.

Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.

Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit.

WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather, temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause brain damage or even death. Always take all children and animals with you or leave a responsible person with them.

Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous.

This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.

They could play with power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle with children.

Child booster seats

Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh

40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious injury.

To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a belt-positioning booster seat.

100

CIMS #1065521 com_safety_belts.mbs

itdseq=127

CIMS #992731 com_booster_seat.mazda

itdseq=128

PAGE: 100 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og

REVIEW COPY ——





Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably for growing children.

When children should use booster seats

Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about

80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old).

Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions:

• Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat without slouching?

• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?

• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?

• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?


Types of booster seats

There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:

• Those that are backless.

If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield and use the lap/shoulder belt. If a seating position has a low seat back and no head restraint, a backless booster seat may place your child’s head (top of ear level) above the top of the seat. In this case, use a high-backed booster seat.

101 art=cgrss526_b art=mbsss109_a


REVIEW COPY ——





• Those with a high back.

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be a better choice.

Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb..

Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.

art=mbsss110_a art=251ss030_a

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition.

The importance of shoulder belts

Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster seat with combination lap/shoulder belts.

WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

102


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.

WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision.

SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN

Child and infant or child safety seats

Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.

When installing a child safety seat:

• Review and follow the information presented in the Airbag

Supplemental Restraint System section in this chapter.

• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from).

• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.


• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button, to prevent accidental unbuckling.

103

CIMS #52706 com_child-seat-title itdseq=129

CIMS #1250809 com_child-safe-seats.mbs2

itdseq=130 art=comss006_a


REVIEW COPY ——





• Place seat back in upright position.

• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic

locking mode (passenger side front seat).

• Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.

Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps.

WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.

Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts (front outboard passenger seat only)

1. Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt.

CIMS #1124877 com_install-seat_title.mazda

itdseq=131

CIMS #1062868 com_install-seat.mbs

art=f12ss008_a

WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.

WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active airbag.

104


REVIEW COPY ——





2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together.

art=f12ss009_a

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together, route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted.

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear and feel the latch engage. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it.

art=f12ss010_a art=exdss029_a

105


REVIEW COPY ——





5. To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is extracted and a click is heard.

art=f12ss012_a

6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.

7. Pull the lap belt portion across the child seat toward the buckle and pull up on the shoulder belt while pushing down with knee on the child seat.

art=f12ss013_a

8. Allow the safety belt to retract to remove any slack in the belt.

9. Before placing the child in the seat, forcibly tilt the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place. To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward. There should be no more than one inch of movement for proper installation.

10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat

Steps two through nine.

11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.

106 art=musss552_b


REVIEW COPY ——





Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.

Attaching child safety seats with tether straps

Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap.

The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front seat cushion.

The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions

(shown from top view):

• Bucket seats

CIMS #1062869 com_built-in_anchors.mbs


• 60/40 seats art=mbsss100_a

WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.

107


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion.

2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.

art=ranss573_a

3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.

The tether anchor is located on the rear lower portion of the passenger seat.

art=ranss574_a

108


REVIEW COPY ——





4. Clip the tether strap to the anchor.

art=ranss575_a

WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.

Center seating location 60/40 seats with folding armrest art=ranss576_a art=ranss577_a

When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor.

109


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision.

5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and

shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further instructions to secure the child safety seat.

6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.

110


REVIEW COPY ——





NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS

Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets, highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:

• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;

• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;

• Keep tires properly inflated;

• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and

• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.

Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.

VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS

4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)

A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.

111

CIMS #1434023 com_drive-veh-utility itdseq=134 art=j14gf003_a

CIMS #1434024 com_veh-handle-title itdseq=135

CIMS #1434025 com_veh-system itdseq=136


REVIEW COPY ——





Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow you to select different drive modes as necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be found in the

Driving chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.

On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern.

WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.

How your vehicle differs from other vehicles

SUV and trucks can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:

• Higher – to allow higher load carrying capacity and to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components.

• Shorter – to give it the capability to approach inclines and drive over the crest of a hill without getting hung up or damaging underbody components. All other things held equal, a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.

112 art=supfw001_a

CIMS #1434026 com_veh-dr-differs itdseq=137 art=supfw011_a


REVIEW COPY ——





• Narrower — to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces, particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensional differences, SUV’s and trucks often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition.

These differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car.

art=supfw012_a

INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

New vehicles are fitted with tires that have a rating on them called

Tire Quality Grades. The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United

States Department of Transportation has set.

Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in

Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).

U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.

Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified

113

CIMS #599889 com_tire_grade_info.j14

itdseq=138 art=f12mc027_b

CIMS #54583 com_treads.01

itdseq=139


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA A B C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A B C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

TIRES

Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.

Glossary of tire terminology

• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry.

114

CIMS #599890 com_traction_a-b-c.j14

itdseq=140

CIMS #600046 com_temp_a-b-c.j14

itdseq=141

CIMS #1272072 com_tire-intro itdseq=142

CIMS #1272100 com_glossary-of-tire-terms itdseq=143


REVIEW COPY ——





• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred to as DOT code.

• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.

• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability.

• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].

Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s load carrying capability.

• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.

• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.

• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).

• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.

• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.

• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.

• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.

• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

INFLATING YOUR TIRES

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.

Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required.

115

CIMS #1513806 com_gen-tire-in.tpms.mazda

itdseq=144


REVIEW COPY ——





At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda.

Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare

(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.

Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns.

NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires.

WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or

(blowout(, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.

A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!

Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or

Tire Label.

When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding

116

CIMS #1513866 com_tire-inf.tpms.mazda

itdseq=145


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.

If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.

To check the pressure in your tire(s):

1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile.

Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air pressure when tires are hot.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.

3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure

Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

4. Replace the valve cap.

5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.

Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire

Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15

bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare

Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label.

6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.

7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.

TIRE CARE

Inspecting your tires

Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the

117

CIMS #1272124 com_care-for-tires itdseq=146

CIMS #1444638 com_tire-inspection itdseq=147


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.

Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:

Tire wear

When the tread is worn down to

1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear indicators, or “wear bars”, which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).

When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be replaced.

Damage

Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also recommended.

CIMS #1272512 com_tire-wear itdseq=148 art=tsnmc001_a

CIMS #1512511 com_tire-damage itdseq=149

118


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Age

Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed, inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.

In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently.

You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After

2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

Tire Replacement Requirements

Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability.

CIMS #1512512 com_tire-age itdseq=150

CIMS #1519956 itdseq=151 com_usdot

CIMS #1497287 com_tire-rpl-06tpms itdseq=152

119


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification

Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these labels then you should consult your Mazda dealer. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized dealer.

WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.

When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:

1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.

2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.

3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.

4. Use both eye and ear protection.

For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the maximum pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting.

Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire wheel assembly.

Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle.

120


REVIEW COPY ——





It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair.

The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.

The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor

Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring

System.

If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some component of the TPMS may be damaged.

Safety practices

Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.

• Observe posted speed limits

• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

• Avoid potholes and objects on the road

• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking

WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).

The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Highway hazards

No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but your safety is more important.

If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

121

CIMS #1272513 com_tire-safety-practices itdseq=153


REVIEW COPY ——





Tire and wheel alignment

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving, the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a

Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.

Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.

The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.

NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the time they are installed.

Tire rotation

Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the

Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and

Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and longer tire life.

CIMS #1302692 com_tire-align-mazda itdseq=154

CIMS #1350081 com_rotate-tires-mazda itdseq=155

122


REVIEW COPY ——




• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles (front tires at top of diagram)

Tires, Wheels and Loading art=f23mc121_a

123


REVIEW COPY ——





• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) vehicles/Four Wheel Drive

(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (front tires at top of diagram) art=f23mc122_a

Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.

Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a

Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.

Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation.

Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.

INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL

Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall.

124

CIMS # com_sidewall-info itdseq=156


REVIEW COPY ——





Information on “P” type tires

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size, load index and speed rating. The definitions of these items are listed below. (Note that the tire size, load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example.)

1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks.

Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO

(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire

Manufacturing Association).

2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.

3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.

6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your

Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.

Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.

7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.

125

CIMS #1272097 com_pass-tire-information itdseq=157 art=f23mc119_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law.

Letter rating

M

N

Q

Speed rating - mph (km/h)

81 mph (130 km/h)

87 mph (140 km/h)

99 mph (159 km/h)

R

S

T

U

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

H

V

W

Y

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (299 km/h)

Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of

1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or

AT: All Terrain, or

AS: All Season.

10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety

126


REVIEW COPY ——





Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.

12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1 ⁄

2

) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification

Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.

127


REVIEW COPY ——





Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type tires

“LT” type tires have some additional information beyond those of “P” type tires; these differences are described below:

1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association

(T&RA), that is intended for service on light trucks.

2. Load Range/Load Inflation

Limits: Indicates the tire’s load-carrying capabilities and its inflation limits.

3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).

4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single; defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.

CIMS #1272098 com_lt-tire-information itdseq=158 art=f23mc120_b

128


REVIEW COPY ——





Information on “T” type tires

“T” type tires have some additional information beyond those of “P” type tires; these differences are described below:

T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.

Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example.

1. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated by the Tire and Rim

Association (T&RA), that is intended for temporary service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks.

2. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the wider the tire.

3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.

4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.

R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.

5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter.

Location of the tire label

You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the

Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.

CIMS #1280261 com_t-tire-information itdseq=159 art=f23mc123_b

CIMS #1450451 com_placard-loc-ref itdseq=160

129


REVIEW COPY ——





TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter.

Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

CIMS #1298876 com_tpms-title itdseq=161

CIMS #1497798 com_tpms.06

itdseq=162 art=winis320_a

130


REVIEW COPY ——





Changing tires with TPMS

Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel.

The pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed. The pressure sensor is located opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid

damaging the sensor. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer.

The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using an accurate tire gauge, refer to

Inflating your tires in this chapter.

Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low

Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is 25% below the pressure listed on the Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF, your tire pressure still needs to be checked.

When your temporary spare tire is installed (if equipped)

When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare (T-type spare/Mini spare or Dissimilar spare), the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.

To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System, have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section.

131 art=229mc500_b

CIMS #1526106 com_understand-tpms.j14

itdseq=163


REVIEW COPY ——





When you believe your system is not operating properly

The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring

System:

132


REVIEW COPY ——





Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

Possible cause Customer Action Required

Solid Warning Light Tire(s) under-inflated

1. Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated; refer to Inflating

your tires in this chapter.

2. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire

Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar) the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light will turn OFF.

Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use. Repair the damaged road wheel/tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality. For a description on how the system functions, refer to When your temporary

spare tire is installed in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.

133


REVIEW COPY ——





Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

Flashing Warning

Light

Possible cause Customer Action Required

Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in use. Repair the damaged road wheel and re-mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality. For a description of how the system functions under these conditions, refer to

When your temporary spare

tire is intalled in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light is still ON, have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.

When inflating your tires

When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires.

It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended tire pressure.

How temperature affects your tire pressure

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi

(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi

(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is

134


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading underinflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure.

SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS

WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle components.

NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you currently have on your vehicle.

The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and specifications as those originally installed.

Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:

• Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the wheels.

• Use only SAE Class S chains.

• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.

Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains for you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in snow and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not work, remove the cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.

Have the cables or chains fitted by a professional before proceeding.

• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.

• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains.

VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating

135

CIMS #684807 com_snow_tires_chains.mbs

itdseq=164

CIMS #1355516 com_load-label-def itdseq=165


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s

Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

136


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading art=f23gf110_b

Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door

(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire

Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND

CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.

WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.

137


REVIEW COPY ——





Example only: art=ecogf501_a art=ecogf500_a art=f23gf112_b

Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle

(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

138


REVIEW COPY ——





GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer.

art=f23gf113_b

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo + passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo).

The GVWR is shown on the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.

The GVW must never exceed the

GVWR.

MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.

FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION

DATE: XX/XX GVWR: XXXXX LB / XXXXX KG

FRONT GAWR: XXXX L

XXXX KG WITH

REAR GAWR: XXXX LB

XXXX KG WITH

XXXX/XXXXXXX

XXXX.XX

TIRES

RIMS

XXXX/XXXXXXX

XXXX.XX

TIRES

RIMS

AT XXX kPa/XX PSI COLD AT XXX kPa/ XX PSI

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR

VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN

EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.

VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

TYPE: XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX

EXT PNT: XX RC: XX DSO:

WB BRK INT TR TP/PS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX

XXX X XX X XX X XX XXX

XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX

WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification

Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.

139 art=mazmc001_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading art=f23gf115_c

GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle

(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.

GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.

(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at

GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.

The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of

10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized

dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer) for more detailed information.

Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.

Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.

(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)

WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.

WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.

140


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.

Steps for determining the correct load limit:

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) =

295 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:

• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -

(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x

99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.

• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio

141


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh

220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x

100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -

540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the load calculation would be:

1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.

The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross

Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance

Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.

Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and utility-type vehicles

WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.

WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.

Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.

Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.

Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.

142

CIMS #954537 com_loading-warnings.fly

itdseq=166

CIMS #101936 com_towing.title

itdseq=167

CIMS #685186 com_towing.bseries

itdseq=168


REVIEW COPY ——





Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these components carefully after any towing operation.

4x2 w/manual transmission

Engine Rear axle ratio

Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)

Maximum trailer weight - lb.

(kg)

2.3L

All

Regular Cab

4,800 (2,177) 1,580 (717)

3.0L*

3.0L*

Dual

Sport

3.73

4.10

Maximum frontal area of trailer ft

2

(m

2

)

Equal to frontal area of vehicle

6,000 (2,722) 2,660 (1,207) 50 (4.64)

6,000 (2,722) 2,520 (1,143) 50 (4.64)

2.3L

All

Cab Plus 4

4,800 (2,177) 1,420 (644) Equal to frontal area of vehicle

6,000 (2,722) 2,480 (1,125) 50 (4.64) 3.0L*

3.0L*

Dual

Sport

4.0L

3.73

4.10

6,000 (2,722) 2,360 (1,070) 50 (4.64)

All 7,000 (3,175) 3,400 (1,542) 50 (4.64)

4.0L Dual

Sport

All 7,000 (3,175) 3,280 (1,488) 50 (4.64)

For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) elevation.

*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed

45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.

For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.

143


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading ratio


Engine Rear axle Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)


2

(m

2

)

To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.

Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR).

Engine


Rear axle ratio

Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)

Regular Cab


2

(m

2

)

3.0L*

4.0L

All

All

6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061) 50 (4.64)

7,000 (3,175) 3,260 (1,479) 50 (4.64)

Cab Plus 4

7,000 (3,175) 3,100 (1,406) 50 (4.64) 4.0L

All

For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) of elevation.



For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.

To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see

Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.

144


REVIEW COPY ——





Engine ratio


Rear axle Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)


2

(m

2

)


(GCWR).

2.3L

All

4x2 w/automatic transmission

Engine Rear axle ratio

Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)

Regular Cab

5,500 (2,495) 2,260 (1,025)

3.0L*

3.0L*

Dual

Sport

3.73

4.10


2

(m

2

)

Equal to frontal area of vehicle

6,000 (2,722) 2,620 (1,188) 50 (4.64)

6,000 (2,722) 2,480 (1,125) 50 (4.64)

2.3L

4.10

3.73

4.10

Cab Plus 4

5,500 (2,495) 2,100 (953) Equal to frontal area of vehicle

6,000 (2,722) 2,420 (1,098) 50 (4.64)

6,000 (2,722) 2,320 (1,052) 50 (4.64)

3.0L*

3.0L*

Dual

Sport

4.0L

4.0L Dual

Sport

All

All

9,500 (4,309)

9,500 (4,309)

5,860 (2,658)

5,760 (2,612)

50 (4.64)

50 (4.64)

145


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading ratio


Engine Rear axle Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)


2

(m

2

)

For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) elevation.



For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.

To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular vehicle, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.


(GCWR).

Engine


Rear axle ratio

Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)

3.73

All


2

(m

2

)

Regular Cab

6,000 (2,722) 2,300 (1,043) 50 (4.64)

9,500 (4,309) 5,720 (2,594) 50 (4.64)

3.0L*

4.0L

4.0L

All

Cab Plus 4

9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540) 50 (4.64)

For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300 meters) of elevation.

146


REVIEW COPY ——





Engine


Rear axle ratio

Maximum

GCWR - lb.

(kg)


(kg)


2

(m

2

)



For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.

To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see

Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.


(GCWR).

WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.

The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar.

WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.

Preparing to tow

Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.

Hitches

For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg).

147

CIMS #53196 com_prep-and-hitches itdseq=169

CIMS #710091 com_hitches.mbs

itdseq=170


REVIEW COPY ——





Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable rental agency.

Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious gases or water from entering.

Safety chains

Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.

If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you.

Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.

Trailer brakes

Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.

WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.

The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the

GVWR not GCWR.

Trailer lamps

Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.

Using a step bumper

The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a

2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight capability.

148

CIMS #81316 com_safety-chains itdseq=171

CIMS #81317 com_trailer-brakes itdseq=172

CIMS #81318 com_trailer-lamps itdseq=173

CIMS #710092 com_use-step-bumper.mbs

itdseq=174


REVIEW COPY ——





The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse.

Trailer tow connector

The trailer tow connector is located under the rear bumper, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

4

3

Refer to the following chart for information regarding the factory-equipped trailer tow connector:

Trailer tow connector

Color Function

1. Dark Green Trailer right-hand turn signal

2. Yellow

3. Tan/White

4. White

Trailer left-hand turn signal

Tail lamp

Ground

Comment

Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and right-hand turn signal is applied.

Circuit activated when brake pedal is depressed or when ignition is on and left-hand turn signal is applied.

Relay controlled circuit activated when the park lamps/headlamps are on.

Matching vehicle circuit returns to battery’s negative ground.

2

1

149

CIMS #476432 com_towconnect.ran

itdseq=175 art=ranmc721_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Driving while you tow

When towing a trailer:

• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first

500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle starts.

• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.

• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.

• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the

Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the

Driving chapter.)

• Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to

Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.

Servicing after towing

If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance

information for more information.

Trailer towing tips

• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.

• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.

• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.

• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle

150

CIMS #1514926 com_drivin-while-you-tow.mbs

itdseq=176

CIMS #83488 com_towing-tips.02

itdseq=177


REVIEW COPY ——




Tires, Wheels and Loading lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.

• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.

• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)

(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.

Launching or retrieving a boat

Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed from the water.

When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:

• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.

• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.

Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:

• causing internal damage to the components.

• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.

Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair required.

RECREATIONAL TOWING

Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged.

Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:

Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these guidelines for recreational towing:

Before you have your vehicle towed:

• Release the parking brake.

151

CIMS #81391 com_launch-retrieving_boat.1

itdseq=178

CIMS #555656 com_recreational-towing.ran

itdseq=179


REVIEW COPY ——





• Move the gearshift to the neutral position.

• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.

• The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h).

• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.

• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)

• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no damage is done to the internal transmission components.

For 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission, it is recommended that a

Neutral Tow Kit be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if the vehicle is towed frequently.

In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing apparatus if one has been installed.

Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission

4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these guidelines for recreational towing:

• Release the parking brake.

• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.

• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).

• Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).

• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.

• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)

• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no damage is done to the internal transfer case components.

For 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission, a Neutral Tow Kit must be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded.

For 4x2 vehicles with an automatic transmission, if a distance of 50 miles

(80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded, you must disconnect the rear driveshaft. It is recommended that the driveshaft be removed/installed only by an authorized dealer. See your authorized dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.

Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case components.

152


REVIEW COPY ——





CAMPER BODIES

Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies.

CIMS #695136 com_no-camper.bseries

itdseq=180

153


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

STARTING

Positions of the ignition

1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running.

2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel, automatic transmission gearshift lever and allows key removal.

2

3

4

5

3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all accessories without locking the steering wheel. This position

1 also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed.

WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.

To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.

4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key position when driving.

5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine starts.

Preparing to start your vehicle

Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.

Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise.

When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to

Starting the engine in this chapter.

154

CIMS #727778 com_starting-title itdseq=181

CIMS #77457 com_ignition_positions.04

itdseq=182 art=exdto300_a

CIMS #1129631 com_starting-vehicle.mbs

itdseq=183


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk of fire or other damage.

WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.

WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.

Important safety precautions

When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle checked.

Before starting the vehicle:

1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the

Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.

2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.

If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:

CIMS #684692 com_imp-precautions.mbs

itdseq=184

155


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

• Make sure the parking brake is set.

art=unogf300_h

• Make sure the gearshift is in P

(Park).

If starting a vehicle with a manual transmission:

1. Make sure the parking brake is set.

2. Push the clutch pedal to the floor.

3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START).

4

3

5

2

1

If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:

• front wheels are turned

• front wheel is against the curb

• steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle

156 art=rangf120_a art=ctogf111_a art=exdto300_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and

chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights.

Starting the engine

Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.

1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without turning the key to 5 (START). If there is difficulty in turning the key, rotate the steering wheel

3

4 until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:

2

• the front wheels are turned

• a front wheel is against the curb

1

Turn the key to 5 (START), then release the key as soon as the engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.

5

Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel.

Guarding against exhaust fumes

Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.

WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.

Important ventilating information

If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)

An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is

157

CIMS #1129632 com_start.mbs

itdseq=185 art=f12st004_b

CIMS #954491 com_guarding-fumes.fly

itdseq=186

CIMS #954493 com_ventilation.fly

itdseq=187

CIMS #954489 com_engine-block-heater.fly

itdseq=188


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach

-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged

(cheater) adapters.

BRAKES

Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.

Refer to Brake system warning

light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light.

!

P

BRAKE

Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)

This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system.

NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away.

A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.

CIMS #954495 com_brake_info.fly

itdseq=189 art=dnogf004_a

CIMS #713206 com_abs_info.mbs

itdseq=190

158


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied. The accompanying illustration depicts the advantage of an ABS equipped vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking traction.

WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to stop.

Using ABS

When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.

ABS warning lamp

The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start up, remains on or flashes, the

ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.

Even when the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. (If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released, have your brake system serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)

!

ABS

P

BRAKE

159 art=comss004_a

CIMS #954499 com_abs_use.fly

itdseq=191

CIMS #954498 com_abs_warn.fly

itdseq=192 art=dnogf001_a art=dnogf004_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

Parking brake

Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked. To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops.

CIMS #684693 com_park_brake.mbs

itdseq=193 art=unogf300_h

The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated (when the ignition is turned ON) until the parking brake is released.

!

P

BRAKE

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).

NOTE: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.

However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.

Pull the release lever to release the brake.

Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy.

art=dnogf004_a art=expgf303_b

160


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

STEERING

Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.

To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:

• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.

• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir.

• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer.

• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer.

• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.

If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)

• Uneven vehicle loading

• High crown in center of road

• High crosswinds

• Wheels out of alignment

• Loose or worn suspension components

TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the

Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.

This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.

PREPARING TO DRIVE

WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

161

CIMS #244756 com_steering.04

itdseq=194

CIMS #954505 com_axle-statement.fly

itdseq=195

CIMS #954507 com_prep-to-drive.fly

itdseq=196


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.

WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at slower speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing for increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded vehicle. Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Brake-shift interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.

If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:

CIMS #197246 com_auto-trans.ie

itdseq=197

CIMS #1124643 com_bsi.mbs

itdseq=198

162


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the key.

2. Insert the key and turn it to

OFF. Apply the brake pedal

and shift to N (Neutral).

WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.

To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle.

If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever, it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside

Emergencies chapter.

WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working.

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the

LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly. See your authorized dealer.

Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped) art=mbsto300_a

CIMS #1129633 com_5r55e.mbs

itdseq=199 art=rangf120_a

163


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.

Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive

Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating parameters. This learning process could take several transmission upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift scheduling will resume.

WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.

P (Park)

This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from turning.

To put your vehicle in gear:

• Start the engine

• Depress the brake pedal

• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear

To put your vehicle in P (Park):

• Come to a complete stop

• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)

WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the

LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.

R (Reverse)

With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R

(Reverse).

164


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

N (Neutral)

With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.

(Overdrive)

The normal driving position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one through

O/D

ON/OFF five.

(Overdrive) can be deactivated by pressing the transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever.

This will illuminate the O/D OFF lamp and activate Drive.

O/D

OFF

Drive (not shown)

Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.

• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.

• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.

• Provides engine braking.

• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer towing and when engine braking is required.

• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.

• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned off.

2 (Second)

Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional engine braking on downgrades.

1 (First)

• Provides maximum engine braking.

• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.

• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First) when vehicle reaches slower speeds.

Forced downshifts

• Allowed in

(Overdrive) or Drive.

165 art=rangf110_a art=expis024_a


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

• Depress the accelerator to the floor.

• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

1

2

3 5

4 R

Using the clutch

The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.

To start the vehicle:

1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.

2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the neutral position.

3. Start the engine.

4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while slowly pressing on the accelerator.

During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.

Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with the full extension of the clutch pedal.

Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission components or damage the transmission.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.

Recommended shift speeds

Downshift according to the following charts for your specific engine/drivetrain combination:

166

CIMS #72083 itdseq=200 com_manual art=ctogf101_b

CIMS #72084 com_using_clutch.rwd

itdseq=201

CIMS #1124644 com_shift-speeds.mbs

itdseq=202


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

Shift from:

1 -2

2 - 3

3 - 4

4 - 5 (Overdrive)

Upshifts

Transfer case position (if equipped)

2WD and 4H 4L

10 mph (16 km/h)

19 mph (26 km/h)

28 mph (43 km/h)

40 mph (68 km/h)

4 mph (6 km/h)

8 mph (10 km/h)

12 mph (16 km/h)

16 mph (26 km/h)

Shift from:

Maximum downshift speeds

Transfer case position (if equipped)

5 (Overdrive) - 4

2WD and 4H 4L

55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h)

4 - 3

3 - 2

2 - 1

45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h)

35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h)

20 mph (32 km/h) 8 mph (11 km/h)

Reverse

1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.

2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).

• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).

This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).

Parking your vehicle

1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.

2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).

3. Turn the ignition off.

WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set the parking brake fully.

167

CIMS #1035364 com_reverse.uno

itdseq=203

CIMS #72086 com_parking.rwd

itdseq=204


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

Removing the key

Turn the ignition off, push the release lever (located above the ignition), then turn the key toward you and remove the key.

CIMS #1035362 com_remove-key itdseq=205 art=rangf114_a

PUSH

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.

Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.

If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the

4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no

reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper operation.

4WD system indicator lights

• 4x4 - Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started.

Illuminates when 4H (4WD High) is engaged.

4x4

168

CIMS #1058177 com_rocking-vehicle itdseq=206

CIMS #73625 itdseq=207 com_four_wd

CIMS #1114726 com_4wd-lights.ran2003

itdseq=208 art=f12ip031_a


REVIEW COPY ——




• 4x4 LOW – Momentarily illuminates when the vehicle is started. Illuminates when 4L

(4WD Low) is engaged.

Using the electronic shift 4WD system

4H

2H 4L

4x4

LOW

Driving art=expis340_a

CIMS #1114746 com_electronic-4wd.ran2003

itdseq=209 art=f12gf104_c

2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and highway driving.

4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.

4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand, steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.

Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)

• Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at a stop or any forward speed.

Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.

Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)

Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.

This is normal and should be no reason for concern.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop

2. Depress the brake

3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, depress the clutch.

4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.

169


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

• If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.

• If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.

Driving off-road with 4WD

Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.

How your vehicle differs from other vehicles

Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without getting hung up or damaging underbody components.

The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car.

Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.

Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes.

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as rocks and stumps.

You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.

Basic operating principles

• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.

4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose surfaces.

• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle.

• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement

• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the

170

CIMS #83537 com_driving-offroad.02

itdseq=210


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.

• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.

• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern.

WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

If your vehicle gets stuck

If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.

Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).

The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

Emergency maneuvers

• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e., turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid

171


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel.

• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.

WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again, avoid these abrupt inputs.

Sand

When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels.

Mud and water

If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake capability may be limited.

When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.

Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

172


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components.

If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water, their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.

Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage.

Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required.

Driving on hilly or sloping terrain

When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up, straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the other side of a hill before driving over the crest.

When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.

When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear when added engine braking is desired.

When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load.

If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal.

If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph [50 km/h]).

Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of a lower gear.

(Overdrive) into

Driving on snow and ice

A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.

Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop.

173


REVIEW COPY ——




Driving

When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady pressure on the brake pedal.

Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.

Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause internal transmission damage.

Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.

Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.

CIMS #954533 com_deep-water.fly

itdseq=211 art=taumc713_b

174


REVIEW COPY ——





HAZARD FLASHER

The hazard flasher is located on the steering column, just behind the steering wheel. The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition.

Push in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash. Press the flasher control again to turn them off. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.

FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH

This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.

After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch may have been activated.

CIMS # com_hazard-flasher-info itdseq=212 art=rancf500_a

CIMS #1296506 com_fuel-pump-shutoff.ran

itdseq=213

175


REVIEW COPY ——





The fuel pump shut-off switch is located under the right-hand side of the glove box, just above the carpet.

To reset the switch:

1. Turn the ignition OFF.

2. Check the fuel system for leaks.

3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the switch by pushing in on the reset button.

4. Turn the ignition ON.

5. Wait a few seconds and return the key to OFF.

6. Make another check for leaks.

art=raner102_c

FUSES AND RELAYS

Fuses

If electrical components in the vehicle are not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before replacing any electrical components.

15

Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.

CIMS #55291 com_fuses-relays.01

itdseq=214

CIMS #55297 itdseq=215 com_fuse.01

art=dnoer001_c

176


REVIEW COPY ——





Standard fuse amperage rating and color

COLOR

Fuse rating

Mini fuses

Standard fuses

Maxi fuses

20A

25A

30A

40A

50A

60A

70A

80A

2A

3A

4A

5A

7.5A

10A

15A

Grey

Violet

Pink

Tan

Brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Natural

Green

—

—

—

—

—

Grey

Violet

Pink

Tan

Brown

Red

Blue

Yellow

Natural

Green

—

—

—

—

—

Yellow

—

Green

Orange

Red

Blue

Tan

Natural

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Passenger compartment fuse panel

The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument panel behind the kick panel. A fuse puller tool is located near the top left corner of the fuse box; this tool will assist you in pulling the fuses out for inspection, if necessary.

Cartridge maxi fuses

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

Blue

—

Pink

Green

Red

Yellow

—

Black

Fuse link cartridge

Blue

—

Pink

Green

Red

Yellow

Brown

Black

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

CIMS #55301 com_fuse_amp_rating.01

itdseq=216

CIMS #1252347 com_passenger-title.ran

itdseq=217 art=raner523_a

177


REVIEW COPY ——





CIMS #683868 com_passenger-mbs itdseq=218 art=raner505_c

The fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay

Location

1

2

5

6

7

3

4

8

Fuse Amp

Rating

5A

10A

10A

10A

30A

10A

5A

10A

9 5A

Passenger Compartment Fuse

Panel Description

Instrument panel dimmer switch

Trailer tow park lamps

Right low beam headlamp

Left low beam headlamp

Windshield wipers/washer

Radio (RUN/ACCY)

Not used (spare)

Restraints Control Module (RCM),

PADI (Passenger Air bag

Deactivation Indicator), Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS)

Cluster air bag indicator

178


REVIEW COPY ——




21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

Fuse/Relay

Location

10

11

15

16

17

18

19

20

12

13

14


Fuse Amp

Rating

10A

10A

15A

15A

15A

—

30A cartridge fuse

15A

—

20A



Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4 module (RUN/START)

Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic power)

Audiophile subwoofer amplifier,

Satellite radio

Horn, Interior lamps

High beam headlamp, High beam indicator (cluster)

One-touch down relay

Power windows

10A

5A

5A

30A

20A

—

2A

10A

15A

20A

Turn signals/Hazards

Not used

Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL)/Stop lamps

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module, Brake-shift interlock,

Speed control module, Back-up lamps, Overdrive cancel switch,

Electronic flasher (turn/hazard)

Starter relay coil

Radio (START)

Headlamps (low and high beam)

Radio battery feed (B+)

Accessory relay

Redundant cruise switch

Climate control blower relay/blend doors

4x4 module battery feed (B+)

Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector

(OBD II)

179


REVIEW COPY ——





Fuse/Relay

Location

30

31

32

33

Fuse Amp

Rating

5A

20A

5A

5A

34

35

20A

15A

Power distribution box

The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment.

The power distribution box contains high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems from overloads.



Power mirrors

Front park lamps, Rear park lamps, License plate lamps,

Dimmer switch, Trailer tow park lamps

Brake switch (logic)

Instrument cluster battery feed

(B+)

Power point

Power locks

CIMS #1273111 com_power-dist-title.mbs

itdseq=219 art=raner500_b

WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing fuses.

WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.

If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the

Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.

180


REVIEW COPY ——




2.3L engine (if equipped)


CIMS #708397 com_power-box-mbs.23l

itdseq=220 art=raner512_b

The high-current fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay

Location

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Fuse Amp

Rating

40A**

—

40A**

—

50A**

—

40A**

—

40A**

—

30A**

Power Distribution Box

Description

Passenger compartment fuse panel

Not used


Not used


Not used

Starter solenoid

Not used

Ignition switch

Not used

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay

181


REVIEW COPY ——





Fuse/Relay

Location

12

13

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

18

19

20

21

34

35

36

37

38

39

Fuse Amp

Rating

—

30A**

—

—

—

40A**

—

20A**

—

10A*

—

30A*

—

10A*

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

30A*

—

—

—

—

7.5A*

15A*


Description

Not used

Blower motor (climate control)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) module

Not used

Engine fan

Not used

PCM keep alive power, Canister purge valve solenoid

Not used

Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors

Not used

A/C clutch solenoid

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used


Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Trailer tow (right turn)

PCM power

182


REVIEW COPY ——




Fuse/Relay

Location

40

41

42

43

Fuse Amp

Rating

—

10A*

7.5A*

20A*

44

45A

45B

46A

15A*

—

—

—

46B

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56A

56B —

* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—



Description

Not used

Automatic transmission

Trailer tow (left turn)

Engine fan relay coil, A/C relay,

Engine sensors, VMV solenoid

Ignition coil, Capacitor

Wiper HI/LO relay

Wiper Park/Run relay

Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay

Washer pump relay

Engine fan relay

Starter relay

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

PCM relay

Blower relay

A/C clutch solenoid relay

Not used

183


REVIEW COPY ——





3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped) CIMS #683869 com_power-box-mbs itdseq=221 art=raner514_d

The high-current fuses are coded as follows:

Fuse/Relay

Location

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Fuse Amp

Rating

40A**

—

40A**

—

50A**

—

40A**

—

40A**

—

30A**



Description

Not used


Not used


Not used

Starter solenoid

Not used

Ignition switch

Not used

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relay fuse

184


REVIEW COPY ——




Fuse/Relay

Location

12

13

14

15

16

17

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

18

19

20

21

34

35

36

37

38

39

Fuse Amp

Rating

—

30A**

—

—

—

40A**

—

—

—

10A*

—

30A*

—

10A*

—

20A*

—

—

—

15A*

—

30A*

—

—

—

—

7.5A*

15A*



Description

Not used

Blower motor (climate control)

Not used

Not used

Not used


Not used

Not used

Not used

PCM keep alive power, Canister purge valve solenoid

Not used

Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors

Not used

A/C clutch solenoid

Not used

4x4 module

Not used

Not used

Not used

Foglamps

Not used


Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Trailer tow (right turn)

PCM power

185


REVIEW COPY ——





Fuse/Relay

Location

40

41

42

43

44

45A

45B

46A

46B

47

48A

Fuse Amp

Rating

—

10A*

7.5A*

20A*

15A*

—

—

—

—

—

—

48B

51

52

53

54

55

—

—

56 —

* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses

—

—

—

—


Description

Not used

Automatic transmission

Trailer tow (left turn)

A/C relay coil, Engine sensors,

VMV solenoid, EGR solenoid,

Heated PCV

Ignition coil, Capacitor

Wiper HI/LO relay

Wiper Park/Run relay

A/C clutch solenoid

Washer pump relay

PCM relay

Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors relay

Fog lamp relay

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Blower relay

Starter relay

CHANGING THE TIRES

If you get a flat tire while driving:

• do not brake heavily.

• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.

• hold the steering wheel firmly.

• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

186

CIMS #766082 com_change_tires.152

itdseq=222


REVIEW COPY ——





Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires,

Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.

WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The use of tire sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure

Monitoring System and should not be used.

WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.

Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information

WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.

If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by

Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather than repaired.

A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types:

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR

TEMPORARY USE ONLY”

When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:

• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)

• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the

Safety Compliance Label

• Tow a trailer

187

CIMS #1348491 com_dissimilar-tires itdseq=223


REVIEW COPY ——





• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time

• Use commercial car washing equipment

• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance

• Comfort and noise

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs

• Winter weather driving capability

• Wet weather driving capability

For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If

4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph (16 km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:

• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)

• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time

• Use commercial car washing equipment

• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel

The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the following:

• Handling, stability and braking performance

• Comfort and noise

• Ground clearance and parking at curbs

• Winter weather driving capability

• Wet weather driving capability

• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)

• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)

When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution should be given to:

188


REVIEW COPY ——





• Towing a trailer

• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body

• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack

Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek service as soon as possible.

Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information

This spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving with the full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if you need to use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.

Location of the spare tire and tools

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.

The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following locations:

Tool

Spare tire

Location

Under the vehicle, just forward of the rear bumper

Jack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench

Regular Cab: behind seats and underneath the jack and tools cover

Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind the front seats, between jump seats and underneath jack and tools cover. The lug wrench is held in place with a wingnut.

Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) In the glove box

Removing the spare tire

1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the illustrations.

189

CIMS #1516741 com_full-size-spare itdseq=224

CIMS #1125281 com_spare-tire.mbs

itdseq=225


REVIEW COPY ——





When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following:

• one handle extension and one typical extension. To assemble, slide parts together. To disconnect, depress button and pull apart.

• one wheel nut wrench. Depress button and slide together.

art=raner301_a art=raner302_a

2. If equipped, unlock and remove the spare tire carrier lock from the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate.

art=raner303_a

190


REVIEW COPY ——




3. Insert the square end of the jack handle into the rear access hole located just above the rear bumper and below the tailgate.

Forward motion will stop and resistance to turning will be felt when properly engaged.

4. Turn the handle counterclockwise until tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.

5. Remove the retainer from the spare tire.


Tire change procedure

WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park)

(automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual transmission).

WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.

WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be seriously injured.

art=raner001_a

CIMS #684806 com_change_proc.mbs

itdseq=226

191


REVIEW COPY ——





1. Park on a level surface, activate hazard flashers and place gearshift lever in P (Park)

(automatic transmission) or 1

(First) (manual transmission).

2. Set the parking brake and turn engine OFF.

3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

art=unogf300_b art=naver301_b

4. Insert tapered end of the lug wrench behind hub caps and twist them off.

5. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.

6. Position the jack according to the following guides and turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch (25 mm) off the ground.

WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for changing the tire.

WARNING: Do not let anyone stay in the vehicle when you are using the jack; have them stand in a safe place out of traffic lanes.

192 art=viler304_a


REVIEW COPY ——




• Front

Roadside Emergencies art=raner520_a

• Rear art=raner521_a

Never use the differential as a jacking point. It is too easy for the vehicle to tilt or fall and you can be injured.

7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with the lug wrench.

8. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.

9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

art=mbser300_a

193


REVIEW COPY ——





10. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts, in the order shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.

11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to

Stowing the spare tire.

3

5

1

2

4

12. Stow the jack and lug wrench.

Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.

13. Unblock the wheels.

Stowing the flat/spare tire

Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in failure of cable or loss of spare tire.

1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.

2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and retainer through the center of the wheel.

3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort, take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your earliest convenience.

4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.

5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other components.

6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above the rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack handle.

194 art=viler305_a

CIMS #1112962 com_stow-tire.ran

itdseq=227


REVIEW COPY ——





WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).

Lug nut socket size/Bolt size

Wheel lug nut torque* lb.ft.

N

•m

100 135 Lug nut socket size:

3 ⁄

4

” (19 mm) hex

Bolt size: 1 ⁄

2 x 20

* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.

WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.

Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.

Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area.

OVERHEATING

If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is probably too hot.

If this happens:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.

2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.

3. Turn off the air conditioner.

WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.

195

CIMS #1244586 com_lug-nut-torque.p150

itdseq=228

CIMS #1137423 com_overheating-mazdas itdseq=229


REVIEW COPY ——





4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or from the engine compartment.

• If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling fans will start to cool the engine.

• If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop the engine and let it cool.

5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and water pump.

If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the engine and call an authorized dealer.

WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the engine and radiator are hot.

See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious, carefully add coolant as required.

Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged unless repairs are made.

JUMP STARTING

WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage.

WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if contacted.

Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage.

196

CIMS #52573 com_jump-start itdseq=230


REVIEW COPY ——





Preparing your vehicle

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.

1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.

2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.

4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.

5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges. Turn all other accessories off.

Connecting the jumper cables

CIMS #57613 com_prep-for-jump itdseq=231

CIMS #1269598 com_connecting-cables.mbs

itdseq=232 art=coner703_a

–

–

1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery.

197


REVIEW COPY ——




Roadside Emergencies art=coner702_a

–

–

2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the assisting battery.

–

–

3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the assisting battery.

art=coner701_a

198


REVIEW COPY ——





–

–

4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.

WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.

5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.

Jump starting

1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed.

2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.

CIMS #52575 com_jump_starts itdseq=233

199


REVIEW COPY ——





Removing the jumper cables

–

–

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected.

1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.

Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery.

–

–

2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the booster vehicle’s battery.

CIMS #52576 com_removing-cables itdseq=234 art=coner700_a art=coner701_a

200


REVIEW COPY ——





–

–

3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle’s battery.

–

–

4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the disabled vehicle’s battery.

After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can

relearn its idle conditions.

art=coner703_a

201


REVIEW COPY ——





WRECKER TOWING

CIMS #1218646 com_tow.no-sling-mbs itdseq=235 art=winer104_a

If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your roadside assistance service provider.

It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure.

On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground.

On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground.

If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle damage may occur.

202


REVIEW COPY ——





CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.

If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized

Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following steps:

STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS

MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the authorized dealer or the OWNER.

STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations

If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North

American Operations by one of the following ways:

Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.

Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local

Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.

By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom of the home page).

By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500

By letter at:

Attn: Customer Assistance

Mazda North American Operations

7755 Irvine Center Drive

Irvine, CA 92618–2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623–9734

Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:

1. Your name, address, and telephone number

2. Year and model of vehicle

3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)

203

CIMS #921592 com_assist-usa itdseq=236


REVIEW COPY ——





4. Purchase date and current mileage

5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location

6. Your question(s)

If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda

Distributor.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.

In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:

STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.

STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office

If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer

Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service

Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional

Office nearest you for such arrangements.

STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department

If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations

Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario

L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.

Provide the Department with the following information:



3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification

label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual for the location of the VIN.

4. Purchase date.

5. Present odometer reading.

204

CIMS # com_assist-canada itdseq=237


REVIEW COPY ——






7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.

The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service

Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.

Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence therefore for most effective results.

Mediation/Arbitration Program

Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s

Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.

Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding arbitration.

Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using

CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)

For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.

However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your

Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.

CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial

Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor

Vehicle Arbitration Office At:

205

CIMS #1493251 com_mediation-arbit-mazda itdseq=238

CIMS #1493253 com_camvap-mazda2 itdseq=239


REVIEW COPY ——





235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407

North York, Ontario

M2J 4Y8 http://camvap.ca

Regional Offices

Regional Offices

Mazda Canada Inc.

Western Region

8171 Ackroyd Road

Suite 2000

Richmond, B.C.

V6X 3K1

(604) 303–5670

Mazda Canada Inc.

Central Region

55 Vogell Road

Richmond Hill, Ontario.

L4B 3K5

1 (800) 263–4680

Mazda Canada Inc.

Quebec Region/Atlantic Region

6111 Route Trans

Canadienne

Pointe Claire, Quebec

H9R 5A5

(514) 694–6390

Areas Covered

Alberta,

British Columbia,

Manitoba,

Saskatchewan,

Yukon

Ontario

Quebec,

New Brunswick,

Nova Scotia,

Prince Edward Island,

Newfoundland

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all

Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.

If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized

Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following steps:

STEP 1

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved

206

CIMS #1493252 com_reg-office-mazda itdseq=240

CIMS #605763 com_assist-puertorico itdseq=241


REVIEW COPY ——




Customer Assistance by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS

MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the authorized dealer or the OWNER.

STEP 2

If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).

Please help us by providing the following information:



3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)

4. Purchase date and current mileage


6. Your question(s)

If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,

Attn: Customer Assistance

Plaza Motors Corp.

Mazda de Puerto Rico

P.O. Box 362722

San Juan, Puerto Rico

00936–2722

Tel: (787) 788–9300

This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.

That is our goal.

If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda

Distributor.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)

California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle.

207

CIMS #1066951 com_lemon-law.mazda

itdseq=242


REVIEW COPY ——





California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs first:

1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR

2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity

(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR

3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).

In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address:


7755, Irvine Center Drive

Irvine, CA 92618–2922

MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS

U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)

Mazda North American Operations

7755 Irvine Center Drive

Irvine, CA 92618–2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623–9734

TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)

(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)

(Distributor in each area)

CANADA

Mazda Canada, Inc.

55 Vogell Road

Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada

TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)

(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)

PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS

Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)

P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722

TEL: (787) 788–9300

208

CIMS #605764 com_distributors itdseq=243


REVIEW COPY ——





GUAM

(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)

P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam

TEL: (671) 646–9216

SAIPAN

Pacific International Marianas, Inc.

(d.b.a. Midway Motors)

P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950

TEL: (670) 234–7524

Triple J Saipan, Inc.

(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)

Beach Road

Chalan LauLau

Saipan, MP 96950

TEL: (670) 235–4868

AMERICAN SAMOA

Polynesia Motors, Inc.

P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799

TEL: (684) 699–1854

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty

• Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty

• Anti-perforation Limited Warranty

• Federal Emission Control Warranty

– Emission Defect Warranty

– Emission Performance Warranty

• California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)

• Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

• Tire Warranty

NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda portfolio.

Outside the United States

Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in other countries.

209

CIMS #1493254 com_warranties-mazda2 itdseq=244

CIMS #1493255 com_outside-us-mazda itdseq=245


REVIEW COPY ——





The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.

However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,

Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.

Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export situations and not related to travelers on vacation.

You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United States:

• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.

• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be available.

Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more information.

Outside Canada

Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.

The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the

United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the

United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.

Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export situations and not related to travelers on vacation.

You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of Canada:

• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.

• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be available.

210

CIMS #1493256 com_outside-can-mazda itdseq=246


REVIEW COPY ——





Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more information.

ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES

Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.

WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:

Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.

This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized

Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or accessories.

WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:

Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag

(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems.

Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.

SERVICE PUBLICATIONS

Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.

When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda

Dealer, refer to the chart below.

If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.

211

CIMS #606351 com_non-genuine-accessories itdseq=247

CIMS #689691 com_service-pubs.mbs

itdseq=248


REVIEW COPY ——





PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER

9999 95 022B 06

9999 95 020G 06

9999 95 023C 06

PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION

WORKSHOP MANUAL

WIRING DIAGRAM

OWNER’S MANUAL

WORKSHOP MANUAL:

Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and chassis.

WIRING DIAGRAM:

Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system.

OWNER’S MANUAL:

This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.

Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely maintain Mazda vehicles.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying your Mazda importer/distributor.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or your Mazda importer/distributor).

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

NHTSA

400 Seventh Street, SW

Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

(Note)

If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to:

212

CIMS #606352 com_report-safe-defects itdseq=249


REVIEW COPY ——






7755, Irvine Center Drive

Irvine, California 92618–2922

P.O. Box 19734

Irvine, CA 92623–9734

Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222–5500

If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda

Distributor. See the Mazda importers/distributors section in this chapter.

213


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning

WASHING THE EXTERIOR

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.

• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces.

• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight.

• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results.

• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting.

• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle.

• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s paintwork and trim over time.

• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a car wash.

• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash off as soon as possible.

WAXING

Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.

• Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more detailed information.

• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.

• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body

(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.

PAINT CHIPS

Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.

214

CIMS #1091385 com_ext-wash.mazda

itdseq=250

CIMS #1521416 com_exterior-wax.mazda

itdseq=251

CIMS #1001622 com_chip-repair.mazfly

itdseq=252


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning

• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.

• Always read the instructions before using the products.

ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS

Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.

In order to maintain their shine:

• Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.

• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers.

• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.

• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.

• To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil

Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda dealer.

ENGINE

Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:

• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.

• Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water will damage the engine or other engine components.

• Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.

• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.

CIMS #1001623 com_wheel-rim.mazfly

itdseq=253

CIMS #1010871 com_engine-fly.mbs

itdseq=254

215


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning

• 2.3L Engine

2.3L

16 VALVE art=ranmc723_e

• 3.0L Engine art=ranmc704_b

216


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning

• 4.0L Engine art=ranmc708_b

• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the running engine may cause internal damage.

PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available from your dealer.

• For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH shampoo.

• If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil

Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda dealer.

WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES

The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:

• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner

(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your authorized Mazda dealer.

• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains

217

CIMS #1001625 com_ext-plastic.mazfly

itdseq=255

CIMS #1001626 com_wiper.mazfly

itdseq=256


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly.

• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.

• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.

INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS

Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner

(0000–77–430E-15).

• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection.

WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system.

• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.

INTERIOR TRIM

• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry cloth; you may also use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner

(0000–77–430E-15).

• Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the finish.

INTERIOR

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and safety belts:

• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

• Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot

Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda dealer.

• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda dealer.

218

CIMS #1521418 com_inst-panel.mazda

itdseq=257

CIMS #1521417 com_woodtone.mazda

itdseq=258

CIMS #1129642 com_fabric.mazfly-no itdseq=259


REVIEW COPY ——




Cleaning

• If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.

• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials.

UNDERBODY

Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt.

MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS

Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use these products or products of equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda dealer.

CIMS # com_underbody-fly itdseq=260

CIMS #1001629 com_care-prods.mazfly

itdseq=261

219


REVIEW COPY ——





INTRODUCTION

Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.

If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an authorized Mazda Dealer.

Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.

For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda

Dealer.

The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been performed as prescribed.

Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.

Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine

Mazda parts.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control

Systems

Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.

• Repeated short-distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions.

• Towing a trailer.

• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

• Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.

• High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle.

• Off-road operation.

NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.

220

CIMS #608142 com_maint-intro.j14

itdseq=262

CIMS #684323 com_maintenance.mbs

itdseq=263


REVIEW COPY ——





CHART SYMBOLS

I: Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace

A Adjust

R: Replace

L: Lubricate

Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances shown, whichever occurs first.

Maintenance Item

Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km), whichever comes first)

Months x 1000 miles

4

5

8

10

12

15

16

20

20

25

24

30

28

35

32

40

36

45

40

50

44

55

48

60

(x 1000 km) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)

ENGINE

Engine oil

Oil filter

PCV valve

AIR CLEANER

Air cleaner filter

IGNITION SYSTEM

*3

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

R

Spark plugs

COOLING SYSTEM

Engine Coolant (yellow)

*4

Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72 months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months

I I I I Coolant condition and protection, hoses and clamps — annually — prior to cold weather every 12 months

CHASSIS AND BODY

Wheel lug nut torque

Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X

= recommended interval for optimal tire life)

Clutch reservoir fluid level

*1 I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

I X I X X I X X I X X I

I I I I I

Front wheel bearings (4x2) L

221


REVIEW COPY ——







Months x 1000 miles

4

5

8

10

12

15

16

20

20

25

24

30

28

35

32

40

36

45

40

50

44

55

48

60

Disc brake system

(x 1000 km) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)

I I I I

Caliper slide rails

Drum brake system, lines and hoses

Exhaust system for leaks, damage, looseness

L

I

L

I

I

L

I

L

I

I

Manual transmission fluid

Automatic transmission fluid

Exhaust system shielding (for trapped material)

*2

Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped with grease fittings)

Parking brake system (for damage and operation)

Ball joints (4x2)

Transfer case fluid (4x4)

Rear axle lubricant

L L

I

I/L

L

I

I

I

I/L

L L

I

I/L

L

Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) submerged in water

I/L

Does not require replacement unless rear axle

I

I

I

Accessory drive belts

Fuel filter

Steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and driveshaft

*5

I

R

I I

R

I

*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel

Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.

*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.

*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.

*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and gap specifications.

222


REVIEW COPY ——





*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.

Schedule 1 continued



Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)

ENGINE

Engine oil

Oil filter

PCV valve *3

R

R

R

R

R

R

I

L

I

R

R

R

R

R

R

I

L

I

R

R

R

R

R

R

L

I

I

R

R

R

R

R

R

AIR CLEANER

Air cleaner filter

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs

R R

*4 R

COOLING SYSTEM

Engine Coolant (yellow)

Coolant condition and protection, hoses and clamps — annually —prior to cold weather every 12 months

Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72 months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km) or 36 months

I I I I

CHASSIS AND BODY

Wheel lug nut torque

Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X

= recommended interval for optimal tire life)

Clutch reservoir fluid level

*1 I I I I I I I I I I I I

X X I X X I X X I X X I

I I I I I I

Front wheel bearings (4x2)

Disc brake system

Caliper slide rails

Drum brake system, lines and hoses

L

I

L

I

223


REVIEW COPY ——






Exhaust system for leaks, damage, looseness

(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)

I I

Manual transmission fluid R

*2 I I Automatic transmission fluid

Exhaust system shielding (for trapped material)

I I

Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped with grease fittings)

Parking brake system (for damage and operation)

Ball joints (4x2)

Transfer case fluid (4x4)

Rear axle lubricant

Accessory drive belts

Fuel filter


Months 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96 x 1000 miles 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and driveshaft

*5

L L

I

I/L

I

L

I

I/L

L L

I

I/L

I

L

I

I/L

Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)

Does not require replacement unless rear axle submerged in water

I

R

I

R

I

*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel

Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.

*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.

*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.

*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and gap specifications.

*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.

224


REVIEW COPY ——





SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS

If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the following conditions:

• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures remain below freezing.

• Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads.

• Operating in severe dust conditions.

• Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.

• Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service.

• High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW).

• Off-road operation

Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles

(4,800 km) whichever occurs first.

NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then

Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly.

225


REVIEW COPY ——





Special Operating

Conditions

Suggested Maintenance

Interval

Towing a trailer or using a camper or car top carrier

Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances as in heavy commercial use such as delivery, taxi or patrol car

3,000 miles or

3 months

5,000 miles

15,000 miles

30,000 miles

60,000 miles

As required

As required

As required

30,000 miles

60,000 miles

X X X X

X X X X X X X

Operating in dusty conditions such as unpaved or dusty roads

Off road operation

X X X

X

X

X X

For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or qualified service professional.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

Owner Maintenance Schedule

The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.

Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified service technician as soon as possible.

While operating your vehicle

226


REVIEW COPY ——





• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the straight ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side when traveling on a smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur, check the transmission fluid level.

• Check automatic transmission Park function.

• Check parking brake.

At least monthly

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

• Check tires for wear and proper air pressure.

• Check engine oil level.

• Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

• Check washer fluid level.

At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall)

• Check power steering fluid level.

• Check clutch fluid level (if equipped).

• Check and clean body and door drain holes.

• Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks.

• Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips.

• Check parking brake for proper operation.

• Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function.

• Check air pressure in spare tire.

• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, safety belt) for operation.

• Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is correct for summer or winter conditions.

227


REVIEW COPY ——





• Check battery water level (non-maintenance free).

• Check battery connections and clean if necessary.

Retightening lug nuts

• Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km) after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).

• Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels

and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.

SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS

To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance

information which makes tracking routine service easy.

If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information” to find out which parts and services are covered.

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE

• Do not work on a hot engine.

• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.

• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.

• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and all fuel related parts.

Working with the engine off

• Automatic transmission:

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

3. Block the wheels.

• Manual transmission:

1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1

(First).

2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.

228

CIMS #604851 com_ser_rec.j14

itdseq=264

CIMS #83506 com_precautions_servicing.04

itdseq=265

CIMS #83508 com_working_off.05

itdseq=266


REVIEW COPY ——






Working with the engine on

• Automatic transmission:

1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).


• Manual transmission:

1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in

N (Neutral).


WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.

OPENING THE HOOD

1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood and support it with the prop rod.

CIMS #83511 com_working_on.05

itdseq=267

CIMS #555081 com_hood-title itdseq=268

CIMS #80404 com_hood_open.03

art=unogf302_a

229


REVIEW COPY ——





IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

2.3L I4 engine

CIMS #71972 com_engine-comp itdseq=270

CIMS #528617 com_2.3L-mbs itdseq=271 art=ranmc141_b

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Engine oil dipstick

4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Power distribution box

8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)

9. Battery

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Air filter assembly

230


REVIEW COPY ——




3.0L V6 engine


CIMS #689982 com_3.0L-mbs itdseq=272 art=ranmc115_h









9. Battery



231


REVIEW COPY ——





4.0L SOHC V6 engine CIMS #713068 com_4.0L-sohc.mbs

itdseq=273 art=expmc101_m








8. Battery




232


REVIEW COPY ——





WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. In very cold weather, do not fill the reservoir completely.

W

ASHER FLU

ID

O

N LY

RADIATOR

COOLANT

ONLY

CIMS #232781 com_windshield_fluid itdseq=274

CIMS #918793 com_wash_fluid.mbs

art=ranmc301_b

Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specification . Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing.

Refer to Refill capacities in this chapter.

State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.

Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.

WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below

40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.

Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.

233

CIMS #1123866 com_check_wipers.mbs

itdseq=276


REVIEW COPY ——





Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.

Changing the wiper blades

1. Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle from the wiper arm. Push the lock pin manually to release the blade and pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm.

2. Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard.

Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.

Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.

To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element.

ENGINE OIL

Checking the engine oil

Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil.

1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan.

3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in

P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual transmission).

4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.

5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

234

CIMS #959871 com_chnge_blades.fly

itdseq=277 art=dnomc009_a

CIMS #52549 itdseq=278

CIMS #1127536 com_chk-oil.maztrk

itdseq=279 com_oil


REVIEW COPY ——




• 2.3L I4 engine

Maintenance and Specifications art=ranmc135_d

• 3.0L V6 engine

MIN MAX art=ranmc156_a

235


REVIEW COPY ——





• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine art=ranmc139_c

6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it again.

• If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and

MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable,

DO NOT ADD OIL.

• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX range.

• 2.3L I4 engine

SAE 5W-20 art=ranmc136_b

236


REVIEW COPY ——




• 3.0L V6 engine

SAE 5W-20

Maintenance and Specifications art=ranmc122_b

• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine

SAE 5W-30 art=207mc008_c

• Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer.

7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.

237


REVIEW COPY ——





Adding engine oil

1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine

oil in this chapter.

2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.

3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the normal range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).

4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.

5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn until it stops.

To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.

Engine Oil Recommendations

2.3L & 3.0L Engines

Look for this certification trademark.

CIMS #1286226 com_add-oil.qtr-turn itdseq=280

CIMS #689983 com_oil-rec.5w20.mbs

itdseq=281 art=expii004_a

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification.

SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability

performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.

238


REVIEW COPY ——





Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in scheduled maintenance.

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.

4.0L Engine

Look for this certification trademark.

art=expii004_a

SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.

Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and

Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification.

Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions, lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.

Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in scheduled maintenance.

Engine Oil Filter Recommendation

Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in scheduled maintenance. Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda) oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be experienced.

239


REVIEW COPY ——





It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter (or another brand meeting Mazda specifications) for your engine.

BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Mazda maintenance-free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service.

CIMS #918794 com_battery.mbs

itdseq=282 art=ranmc105_b

If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.

For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals.

If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water.

Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.

It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage.

WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.

240


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance. To begin this process:

1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.

2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine.

3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.

6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.

• The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.

• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned.

When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and

241

CIMS #72063 com_relearn.03

itdseq=283


REVIEW COPY ——




Maintenance and Specifications will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.

If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.

• Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner.

Follow your local authorized standards for disposal. Call your local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries.

LEAD

RETURN

RECYCLE

ENGINE COOLANT

Checking engine coolant

Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification.

A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant provides:

• maximum cooling system efficiency.

• freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).

• boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.

• an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant gauge.

The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to the engine and cooling system may result.

242 art=dewmc111_a

CIMS #510581 com_cool.title

itdseq=284

CIMS #689984 com_check-add-cool.mbs

itdseq=285


REVIEW COPY ——




• 2.3L engine

Maintenance and Specifications art=ranmc146_a

• 3.0L & 4.0L engines art=ranmc108_a

243


REVIEW COPY ——





When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir.

• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon application).

• Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid mixing incompatible products.

• Refer to scheduled maintenance for service interval schedules.

• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your

vehicle in this chapter.

If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval, the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding

engine coolant in this chapter.

WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location.

Adding engine coolant

Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine coolant that meets a Mazda specification.

• DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).

• DO NOT USE a DEX-COOLt engine coolant or an equivalent engine coolant.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.

• DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.

These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.

• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.

• DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm your engine’s cooling system.

• The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.

244

CIMS #691521 com_adding-coolant.mbs

itdseq=286


REVIEW COPY ——





WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield, it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.

When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the

engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.

• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.

• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

• Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.

A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone

(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating or freezing.

For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.

Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the

2.3L I4 engines use the degas system.

WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being released from the engine cooling system, never remove the reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to follow this warning may result in damage to the engine’s cooling system and possible severe personal injury.

1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool.

2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release.

3. Step back while the pressure releases.

4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.

245


REVIEW COPY ——





5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.

6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss.)

After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer to Checking engine coolant. If the concentration is not 50/50

(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50 coolant concentration.

Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.

If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.

Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.

Recycled engine coolant

Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet

Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components.

Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.

Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.

Coolant refill capacity

To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section.

Severe climates

If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):

• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50%.

246

CIMS #691523 com_recycled-coolant.mbs

itdseq=287

CIMS #52568 com_refill-capacity itdseq=288

CIMS #455269 com_extreme.climates

itdseq=289


REVIEW COPY ——





• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.

• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:

• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40%.

• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.

• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.

• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage.

• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection.

FUEL FILTER

For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to

scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the fuel filter.

Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.

CIMS #246409 com_fuel.filter

itdseq=290

247


REVIEW COPY ——





WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS

Important safety precautions

WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.

Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.

WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.

WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled.

WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:

• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before fueling your vehicle.

• Always turn off the vehicle before fueling.

• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.

• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury.

248

CIMS #52343 itdseq=291 com_fueling

CIMS #1512892 com_fuel-prec.mbs

itdseq=292 art=f12mc032_a


REVIEW COPY ——





• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury.

• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.

• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.

WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.

WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.

Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container:

• Place approved fuel container on the ground.

• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the cargo area/pickup bed).

• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.

• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position.

249 art=mbsmc001_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Fuel Filler Cap

Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off feature.

When fueling your vehicle:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove it.

3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.

4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the filler pipe.

5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.

The comes on when the ignition is turned to the ON position to ensure your bulb is working. When this light turns on, check the fuel filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with on, can activate the indicator. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed fuel filler cap.

If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.

WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.

Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.

WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible personal injury.

Choosing the right fuel

Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is

250

CIMS #918851 com_fuel.cap.ckfuelcap.mbs

itdseq=293

CIMS #52352 com_choosing-fuel itdseq=294


REVIEW COPY ——




Maintenance and Specifications prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.

Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to deteriorate more rapidly.

Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was not designed may not be covered by your warranty.

Cleaner air

Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right

Fuel section.

Octane recommendations

Your vehicle is designed to use

“Regular” unleaded gasoline with pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

87

(R+M)/2 METHOD

We do not recommend the use of gasolines labeled as “Regular” that are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.

Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage.

Fuel quality

If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium” unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use

“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized dealer.

Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty.

251

CIMS #52358 com_clean-air itdseq=295

CIMS #52354 com_octane-recommend.reg

itdseq=296 art=f12mc033_b

CIMS #52356 com_fuel-quality itdseq=297


REVIEW COPY ——





Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.

Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the

World-wide Fuel Charter.

Running out of fuel

Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components.

If you have run out of fuel:

• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal.

• Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon may be required.

• The indicator may come on. For more information on the “check engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights

and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.

ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY

Measuring techniques

Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are

NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).

Filling the tank

The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance

product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.

The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates

252

CIMS #1511346 com_no-fuel.iso

itdseq=298

CIMS #212622 com_essentials-fuel.title

itdseq=299

CIMS #713069 com_measuring-tecniks.mbs

itdseq=300

CIMS #212766 com_filling-the-tank itdseq=301


REVIEW COPY ——




Maintenance and Specifications empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.

The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.

For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:

• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling, an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.

• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time the tank is filled.

• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.

• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.

• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.

• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up.

• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.

Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.

Calculating fuel economy

1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading

(in miles or kilometers).

2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in gallons or liters).

3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading.

4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.

5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel economy:

Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.

Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers traveled.

Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel

253

CIMS #212767 com_calculating-fuel-economy itdseq=302


REVIEW COPY ——




Maintenance and Specifications economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.

Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits

Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.

Habits

• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.

• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy.

• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste fuel.

• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.

• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.

• Slow down gradually.

• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).

• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.

• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.

• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs.

Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy.

• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy.

• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy.

• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.

Maintenance

• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.

• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy.

• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance product

specifications and capacities section of this chapter.

254

CIMS #212768 com_driving-style.title

itdseq=303

CIMS #1280386 com_habits.maz

itdseq=304

CIMS #1516191 com_drvg_style_maint.maz

itdseq=305


REVIEW COPY ——





• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance.

Conditions

• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed.

• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately

1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).

• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may reduce fuel economy.

• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.

• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first

8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.

• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain.

• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.

• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than two-wheel-drive operation.

• Close windows for high speed driving.

EPA window sticker

Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.

The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles.

It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km) expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly:

255

CIMS #212936 com_conditions itdseq=306

CIMS #212938 com_epa-sticker itdseq=307

CIMS #1221316 com_emis-ses.maztrk

itdseq=308


REVIEW COPY ——





• Use only the specified fuel listed.

• Avoid running out of fuel.

• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.

• Have the items listed in the scheduled maintenance section performed according to the specified schedule.

The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.

If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting emission control, such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in performance and durability.

WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.

Illumination of the indicator, charging system warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications.

Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission warranty information.

On board diagnostics (OBD-II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On

256

CIMS #1200842 com_onboard-OBDII itdseq=309


REVIEW COPY ——





Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.

Temporary malfunctions may cause the

Examples are: indicator to illuminate.

1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.

2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.

3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler

cap in this chapter.

4. Driving through deep water – the electrical system may be wet.

These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional vehicle service is required.

If the indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the

OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving with the indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing

Some state/provincial and local governments may have

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing.

If the indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II) description in this chapter.

257

CIMS #460104 com_ready-test.iso

itdseq=310


REVIEW COPY ——





If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if the indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for

I/M testing.

The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:

15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods.

Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started, do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will have to be repeated.

258


REVIEW COPY ——





POWER STEERING FLUID

• 2.3L I4 engine

CIMS #76037 com_check-steering-fluid.04


• 3.0L V6 engine art=ranmc155_a

• 4.0L V6 engine art=expmc501_a

UID

ST

FL

WER

Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only

MERCON t ATF.

259


REVIEW COPY ——





1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C).

2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several times.

3. Turn the engine off.

4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.

5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, until it reaches between the MIN and MAX lines.

BRAKE FLUID

The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear, and will rise when the brake components are replaced.

Fluid levels below the “MAX” line

MAX that do not trigger the brake system warning lamp are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.

WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

WARNING: If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage to your brakes.

WARNING: Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run dry. This may cause the brakes to fail.

260

CIMS #1127051 com_brake_title itdseq=312

CIMS #1265242 com_brake-max.maz

art=unomc300_a


REVIEW COPY ——





CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance for the service interval schedules.

During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step in the reservoir.

Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification.

Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.

WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a physician or Poison Control Center immediately. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.

1. Clean the reservoir cap before removal to prevent dirt and water from entering the reservoir.

2. Remove cap and rubber diaphragm from reservoir.

3. Add fluid until the level reaches the step in the reservoir.

4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and cap onto reservoir.

TRANSMISSION FLUID

Checking automatic transmission fluid

• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for scheduled check and change intervals.

• Transmission does not consume fluid.

• Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see a leak.

• Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles

(30 km) of driving.

To check and add fluid:

1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating temperatures.

261

CIMS #918853 com_clutch.truck.mbs


CIMS #80235 com_transmission-fluid itdseq=315

CIMS #953918 com_check_autotran.fly

itdseq=316


REVIEW COPY ——





2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking.

3. Engage parking brake, start engine.

4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly through all of the gear ranges.

5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running.

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag.

7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube.

8. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. Level should be in the cross-hatched area.

9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures.

Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter for the correct fluid type. The use of any other non-approved fluid may cause internal transmission damage.

10. Fluid can be checked at ambient temperatures between 50–95°F

(10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid until the transmission is at normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled.

Low fluid level

Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at or below the bottom of the dipstick.

High fluid level

Fluid levels above the safe range may cause overheating, shift and/or engagement concerns and internal transmission damage. If an overfill condition occurs, excess fluid should be removed by an authorized dealer.

262 art=ranmc130_a art=ranmc131_a

CIMS #953919 com_trans-level.fly

itdseq=317 art=ranmc129_b art=ranmc132_a


REVIEW COPY ——





Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface.

2. Engage the parking brake fully – put in first gear.

3. Ensure that the vehicle cannot move.

4. Clean the filler plug.

5. Remove the filler plug and inspect the fluid level.

CIMS #1126961 com_chk-man-trans.maz

itdseq=318 art=mbsmc002_a

6. Fluid level should be at the bottom of the opening.

7. Add enough fluid through the filler opening so that the fluid level is at the bottom of the opening.

8. Install and tighten the fill plug securely.

Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the

Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter.

art=f23mc115_a

263


REVIEW COPY ——





TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)



3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.








DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE

Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.

CIMS #918861 com_check-add-tcase.mbs

itdseq=319 art=ranmc128_d art=f12mc022_a

CIMS #918862 com_serv-shaft-yoke.mbs

itdseq=320

264


REVIEW COPY ——





CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID



3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.








art=mbsmc003_a art=f12mc022_a

265


REVIEW COPY ——


MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES

Item

Brake fluid and clutch fluid (if equipped)

Application

All

All

Mazda part name or equivalent

High Performance DOT 3

Motor Vehicle Brake

Fluid

Silicone Lubricant Door weather strips

Hinges, door checks, latches, striker plates, fuel filler door hinge and seat tracks

Transmission

/steering/parking brake linkages and pivots, brake and clutch pedal shaft, clutch pilot bearing and input shaft spline (manual transmission)

All

All

Multi-Purpose Grease

Premium Long-Life

Grease

Capacity

Between MIN and MAX on reservoir

1

—

—

—

Item

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Application

2.3 L I4 engine with manual transmission

2.3L I4 engine with automatic transmission

3.0L V6 engine with manual transmission

3.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission

4.0L V6 engine with manual transmission

4.0L V6 engine with automatic transmission

2.3L I4 engine

3.0L V6 engine

4.0L V6 engine


Premium Engine

Coolant

2

SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil

SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil

Capacity

10.5 quarts (10.0L)

10.2 quarts (9.7L)

15.1 quarts (14.3L)

14.8 quarts (14.0L)

13.7 quarts (13.0L)

13.2 quarts (12.5L)

4.0 quarts (3.8L)

4.5 quarts (4.3L)

5.0 quarts (4.7L)

Item

Power steering fluid

Transfer case fluid

(4X4)

Manual transmission fluid

All

4x4 Vehicles

Automatic transmission fluid (5R44E and

5R55E)

Front axle fluid (4X4)

5-speed manual

4x2 vehicles with

2.3L I4 engine

4x2 vehicles with

3.0L or 4.0L

engines

4x4 vehicles with

3.0L or 4.0L

engines

4x4 Vehicles

Rear axle fluid

Windshield washer fluid

Application

All

All


MERCON t ATF

Capacity

Fill between MAX / MIN line on reservoir

1.25 quarts (1.2L)

2.8 quarts (2.65L)

3

9.9 quarts (9.4L)

5

MERCON tV ATF 4

10.0 quarts (9.5L)

10.3 quarts (9.8L)

5

5

SAE 80W-90 Premium

Rear Axle Lubricant

SAE 80W-90 Premium

Rear Axle Lubricant

Ultra-clear Windshield

Washer Concentrate

3.6 pints (1.7L)

5.0-5.3 pints (2.4-2.5L)

6

2.75 quarts (2.6L)

Item Application


Capacity

Fuel tank

Regular cab

(Short wheel base)

—

17 gallons (64.4L)

Cab Plus 4 19.5 gallons (73.8L)

1

Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when brake components are replaced.

Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal operating range, the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.

2

Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Do not mix different colors or types of coolant. Do not use Mazda Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding engine coolant, in this chapter.

3

Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface.

4 Automatic transmissions that require MERCON t V should only use MERCONt V fluid or fluid that is specified dual usage MERCON t/ MERCONt V. Refer to scheduled maintenance to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.

5

Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.

6 Traction-Lok axles use 4.75–5.0 pints (2.2–2.4L) of rear axle lubricant. Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of

Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles.

Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14 mm) below the bottom of the filler hole.

If submerged in water, the rear axle lubricant should be changed.




ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Engine

Cubic inches

Required fuel

Firing order

2.3L I4 engine

138

87 octane

1-3-4-2

Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch

(1.25–1.35mm)

3.0L V6 engine

182

87 octane

1-4-2-5-3-6

0.051–0.057 inch

(1.29–1.45mm)

4.0L V6 engine

245

87 octane

1-4-2-5-3-6

0.052–0.056 inch

(1.32–1.42mm)

Ignition system EDIS

Compression ratio

9.7:1

EDIS

9.6:1

EDIS

9.7:1

Engine drivebelt routing

CIMS #716286 com_data.mazda

CIMS #685183 com_data.mbs

itdseq=323

CIMS #1549961 com_acc-belt.ran.mbs


• 2.3L I4 Engine without A/C (with A/C similar) art=ranmc202_a

• 3.0L V6 Engine without A/C

270


REVIEW COPY ——




Maintenance and Specifications art=ranmc201_a

• 3.0L V6 Engine with A/C art=ranmc200_a

• 4.0L V6 Engine

271


REVIEW COPY ——





IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE

Safety Compliance Certification Label

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance

Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label may be located. The Safety

Compliance Certification Label is located on the structure (B-Pillar) by the trailing edge of the driver’s door or the edge of the driver’s door.




FRONT GAWR: XXXX L

XXXX KG

XXXX/XXXXXXX

WITH

TIRES

REAR GAWR: XXXX LB

XXXX KG WITH

XXXX/XXXXXXX TIRES

XXXX.XX

RIMS XXXX.XX

RIMS

AT XXX kPa/XX PSI COLD AT XXX kPa/ XX PSI





TYPE: XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX





Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel.

Please note that in the graphic,

XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

CIMS #52653 com_vehicle-info.01

itdseq=325

CIMS #80651 itdseq=326 com_vinplate art=mazmc001_a

CIMS #72686 com_vin-numbers.02

itdseq=327 art=navmc710_a

272


REVIEW COPY ——





The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following information:

1. World manufacturer identifier

2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) /

Restraint System

3. Vehicle line, series, body type

4. Engine type

5. Check digit

6. Model year

7. Assembly plant

8. Production sequence number

TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS

You can find a transmission/transaxle code on the

Safety Compliance Certification

Label . The following table tells you which transmission or transaxle each code represents.




FRONT GAWR: XXXX L

XXXX KG

XXXX/XXXXXXX

XXXX.XX

WITH

TIRES

RIMS

AT XXX kPa/XX PSI COLD

REAR GAWR: XXXX LB

XXXX KG WITH

XXXX/XXXXXXX

XXXX.XX

TIRES

RIMS

AT XXX kPa/ XX PSI





TYPE: XXX

XXXXX

XXXXX





Description

Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E)

Five-speed manual (HD)

Five-speed manual (R1)

Code

D

J

R

273

CIMS #734836 com_vin-info.all

itdseq=328 art=204mc036_a

CIMS #1519411 com_trans-code.maz

itdseq=329 art=mazmc000_a

CIMS #1466219 com_trans-code.ran

itdseq=330


REVIEW COPY ——




Accessories

CELL PHONES

Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:

WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump environment.

CIMS #913856 com_cell_phone-mazda itdseq=331

274


REVIEW COPY ——




A

ABS (see Brakes) .....................158

Airbag supplemental restraint system ..........................................91

and child safety seats ..............94

description ................................91

disposal ......................................96

driver airbag ........................91, 94 indicator light ...........................95

operation .............................91, 94 passenger airbag .................91, 94

Ambulance packages ....................7

Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) .....................................242

Anti-lock brake system (see

Brakes) ..............................158–159

Anti-theft system ........................70

Audio system

Single CD ..................................21

Audio system (see Radio) ..19, 21,

24, 29, 32

Automatic transmission ............162

driving an automatic overdrive .................................163

fluid, specification ..................266

Auxiliary Input Jack ...................37

Auxiliary power point .................58

Axle lubricant specifications ..........266

traction lok ..............................161

B

Battery .......................................240

acid, treating emergencies .....240

jumping a disabled battery ....196

maintenance-free ....................240

Index servicing ..................................240

BeltMinder t .................................86

Brakes ........................................158

anti-lock ...........................158–159 anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light ...........................159

fluid, checking and adding ....260

fluid, specifications .................266

lubricant specifications ..........266

parking ....................................160

shift interlock ..........................162

Break-in period .............................5

Bulbs ............................................50

C

Cargo cage ...................................63

Cell phone warning ...................274

Changing a tire .........................186

Child safety restraints ..............100

child safety belts ....................100

Child safety seats ......................103

attaching with tether straps ..107

in front seat ............................104

in rear seat ..............................104

tether anchorage hardware ...107

Chimes (warning) .......................17

Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment ..............215

instrument panel ....................218

interior .....................................218

interior trim ............................218

Mazda car care products .......219

plastic parts ............................217

washing ....................................214

waxing .....................................214

wheels ......................................215

wiper blades ............................217

275


REVIEW COPY ——




Index

Clock adjust

AM/FM Stereo ...........................19

AM/FM stereo CD ...............21, 24

Premium AM/FM stereo

CD6/MP3 .............................29, 33

Single CD ..................................21

Clutch fluid ..........................................261

operation while driving ..........166

recommended shift speeds ....166

Console ........................................58

Coolant checking and adding ..............242

refill capacities ........................246

specifications ..........................266

Cruise control (see Speed control) ........................................60

Customer Assistance .......203–204,

206

D

Daytime running lamps (see

Lamps) .........................................47

Dipstick engine oil .................................234

Driveline universal joint and slip yoke ....................................264

Driving under special conditions ..................168, 171, 173 mud ..........................................172

sand .........................................172

snow and ice ...........................173

through water .................172, 174

E

Emergencies, roadside jump-starting ..........................196

Emergency Flashers .................175

276

Emission control system ..........255

Engine ........................................270

cleaning ...................................215

coolant .....................................242

idle speed control ...................240

lubrication specifications .......266

service points ..................230–232 starting after a collision .........175

Engine block heater .................157

Engine oil ..................................234

checking and adding ..............234

dipstick ....................................234

filter, specifications ................238

recommendations ...................238

specifications ..........................266

Exhaust fumes ..........................157

F

Foglamps .....................................46

Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......168

driving off road .......................170

electronic shift ........................169

indicator light .........................168

preparing to drive your vehicle .....................................161

Fuel ............................................248

calculating fuel economy .......252

cap ...........................................250

choosing the right fuel ...........250

comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates .................255

detergent in fuel .....................251

filling your vehicle with fuel .248,

250, 252 filter, specifications ................247

fuel pump shut-off switch .....175

improving fuel economy ........252

octane rating ...................251, 270 quality ......................................251


REVIEW COPY ——



/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og running out of fuel .................252

safety information relating to automotive fuels .....................248

Fuel pump shut-off switch .......175

Fuses ..................................176–177

G

Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............250

Gas mileage (see Fuel economy) ...................................252

Gauges .........................................17

H

Hazard flashers .........................175

Headlamps ...................................46

aiming ........................................47

bulb specifications ....................50

daytime running lights .............47

flash to pass ..............................47

high beam .................................46

replacing bulbs .........................51

turning on and off ....................46

Heating heating and air conditioning system .................................43–44

Hood ..........................................229

I

Ignition ...............................154, 270

Infant seats (see Safety seats) 103

Inspection/maintenance (I/M) testing ........................................257

Instrument panel cleaning ...................................218

cluster ........................................12

lighting up panel and interior .47

Index

J location of components ............12

Jack ............................................186

positioning ...............................186

storage .............................186, 189

Jump-starting your vehicle ......196

K

Keys .......................................66, 71 positions of the ignition .........154

L

Lamps bulb replacement specifications chart ..................50

daytime running light ...............47

fog lamps ...................................46

headlamps .................................46

headlamps, flash to pass ..........47

instrument panel, dimming .....47

interior lamps .....................50–51 replacing bulbs .........................51

Lane change indicator (see

Turn signal) .................................49

Lights, warning and indicator ....12

anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........159

Load limits .................................135

Loading instructions .................142

Locks doors ..........................................66

Lubricant specifications ...........266

Lug nuts ....................................195

M

Manual transmission .................166

277


REVIEW COPY ——




Index lubricant specifications ..........266

reverse .....................................167

Mirrors .........................................60

fold away ...................................60

side view mirrors (power) .......60

Motorcraft parts ........................247

O

Octane rating ............................251

Oil (see Engine oil) ..................234

Overdrive .....................................63

Overheating ...............................195

P

Parking brake ............................160

Passenger Occupant

Classification Sensor ...................77

Power distribution box (see

Fuses) ........................................180

Power door locks ........................66

Power mirrors .............................60

Power point .................................58

Power steering ..........................161

fluid, checking and adding ....259

fluid, specifications .................266

Power Windows ...........................59

Preparing to drive your vehicle 161

R

Radio ....................19, 21, 24, 29, 32

Single CD ..................................21

Relays ........................................176

Remote entry system .................67

illuminated entry ......................69

278

S locking/unlocking doors ...........67

panic alarm ...............................67

replacing the batteries .............67

Safety Belt Maintenance ............84

Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ........................75, 79–83

Safety restraints ..............75, 79–83

BeltMinder t ..............................86

extension assembly ..................84

for adults .............................80–82 for children .......................99–100

Occupant Classification

Sensor ........................................77

safety belt maintenance ...........84

warning light and chime ..........85

Safety restraints - tether anchors ......................................107

Safety seats for children ..........103

Safety Compliance

Certification Label ....................272

Satellite Radio Information ........39

Seat belts (see Safety restraints) ....................................75

Seats ............................................73

child safety seats ....................103

SecuriLock passive anti-theft system ..........................................70

Servicing your vehicle ..............228

Setting the clock

AM/FM stereo ...........................19

AM/FM stereo CD ...............21, 24

Premium AM/FM stereo

CD6/MP3 .............................29, 33

Snowplowing .................................7

Spark plugs, specifications .......270


REVIEW COPY ——




Special notice ambulance conversions ..............7

utility-type vehicles ....................6

Specification chart, lubricants .266

Speed control ..............................60

Starting your vehicle .......154–155,

157 jump starting ..........................196

Steering wheel tilting .........................................58

Stereo

Single CD ..................................21

T

Tether anchors ..........................107

Tilt steering wheel ......................58

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)

Roadside Emergencies ...........186

Tires, Wheels and Loading ....130

Tires ...........................113–114, 186 alignment ................................122

care ..........................................117

changing ..........................186, 191 checking the pressure ............117

inflating ...................................115

label .........................................129

replacing ..................................119

rotating ....................................122

safety practices .......................121

sidewall information ...............124

snow tires and chains ............135

spare tire .........................187, 189 terminology .............................114

tire grades ...............................114

treadwear ........................113, 118

Towing .......................................142

Index recreational towing .................151

trailer towing ..........................142

wrecker ....................................202

Traction-lok rear axle ...............161

Transfer case fluid checking .........................264

Transmission automatic operation ...............162

brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....162

fluid, checking and adding

(manual) .................................263

lubricant specifications ..........266

manual operation ....................166

Turn signal ..................................49

V

Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN) ..........................................272

Vehicle loading ..........................135

camper bodies ........................153

Ventilating your vehicle ...........157

W

Warning chimes ...........................17

Warning lights (see Lights) .......12

Washer fluid ..............................233

Water, Driving through .............174

Windows power .........................................59

Windshield washer fluid and wipers ..........................................57

checking and adding fluid .....233

checking and cleaning ............233

replacing wiper blades ...........234

Wrecker towing .........................202

279


REVIEW COPY ——


Mazda 2009 B2300 Truck Owner's Guide

Introduction

Instrument Cluster

Entertainment Systems

Climate Controls

Lights

Driver Controls

Locks and Security

4

66

46

57

12

19

43

Seating and Safety Restraints

Tires, Wheels and Loading

Driving

Roadside Emergencies

Customer Assistance

Cleaning

Maintenance and Specifications

214

220

154

175

203

73

111

Accessories

Index

274

275

Related manuals

Mazda

B4000 Truck 2007

Mazda

B4000 Truck 2006

Mazda

2011 Tribute

Mazda

Automobile 2010 Tribute

Mazda

Tribute 2010

Mazda

B4000 4WD Truck 2004

Mazda

B2300

Mazda

2003 B-Series

Mazda

B4000 4WD 2003

Ford

2006 F-150

Ford

2006 F-150

Ford

2006 F-150